You are on page 1of 100

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 1 JUNE 2011

Dear Students,
Motivate Yourself
One of the greatest virtues of human beings is their ability to think and
act accordingly. The emergence of the techno savvy human from the
tree swinging ape has really been a long journey. This transition has
taken a span of countless centuries and lots of thinking caps have been
involved. Inquisitiveness and aspiration to come out with
the best have been the pillars for man's quest for development.
Self-motivation is the sheer force, which pulled him apart and
distinguished him from his primitive ancestors.
Many times, in our life, when we are reviving old memories we get into
a phase of nostalgia. We feel that we could have done better than what
we had achieved. But thinking back wont rewind the tireless worker
called time. All we can do is promise ourselves that we will give our
very best in the future. But do we really keep up to our mental
commitments? I can guess that 90% answers are in the negative. This is
because of that creepy careless attitude which is slowly, but surely
entering into our mind. We easily forget the pains of yesterday to relish
the joys of today. This is the only time in our life, when we can control
our fate, by controlling our mind. So it is time to pull up our socks and
really motivate ourselves so that we can give our best shot in the future.
Self-motivation is the need of the hour. Only we can control and restrict
ourselves. Its up to us, how we use our mental capabilities to the best
of our abilities.
Here are some Funda's for self-motivation. Don't just read them digest
each one of them and apply them and I bet it will make a better YOU.
The ultimate motivator is defeat. Once you are defeated, you have
nowhere to go except the top.
Then only thing stopping you is yourself.
There is no guarantee that tomorrow will come. So do it today.
Intentions don't count, but action's do.
Don't let who you are, stunt what you want to be.
Success is the greatest motivator.
Your goals must be clear, but the guidelines must be flexible.
Try to include these one liners in your scrapbook or on your favorite
poster. You will be sub-consciously tuned to achieve what you want.
Also do keep in mind that nothing can control your destiny but you!
With Best Wishes for Your Future.

Yours truly


Pramod Maheshwari,
B.Tech., IIT Delhi





































Every effort has been made to avoid errors or
omission in this publication. Inr spite of this,
errors are possible. Any mistake, error or
discrepancy noted may be brought to our
notice which shall be taken care of in the
forthcoming edition, hence any suggestion is
welcome. It is notified that neither the
publisher nor the author or seller will be
responsible for any damage or loss of action to
any one, of any kind, in any manner, there from.
No Portion of the magazine can be
published/ reproduced without the
written permission of the publisher
All disputes are subject to the
exclusive jurisdiction of the Kota
Courts only.
Owned & Published by Pramod
Maheshwari, 112, Shakti Nagar,
Dadabari, Kota & Printed by Naval
Maheshwari, Published & Printed at 112,
Shakti Nagar, Dadabari, Kota.

Editor : Pramod Maheshwari
To fly, we have to have resistance
Volume - 6 Issue - 12
June, 2011 (Monthly Magazine)
Editorial / Mailing Office :
112-B, Shakti Nagar, Kota (Raj.)
Tel. : 0744-2500492, 2500692, 3040000
e-mail : xtraedge@gmail.com
Editor :
Pramod Maheshwari
[B.Tech. IIT-Delhi]
Cover Design
Satyanarayan Saini

Layout
Rajaram Gocher
Circulation & Advertisement
Praveen Chandna
Ph 0744-3040000, 9672977502
Subscription
Sudha Jaisingh Ph. 0744-2500492, 2500692
Strictly reserved with the publishers
Editorial
Unit Price ` 20/-
Special Subscription Rates
6 issues : ` 100 /- [One issue free ]
12 issues : ` 200 /- [Two issues free]
24 issues : ` 400 /- [Four issues free]
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 2 JUNE 2011



Volume-6 Issue-12
June, 2011 (Monthly Magazine)



NEXT MONTHS ATTRACTIONS


Much more IIT-JEE News.
Know IIT-JEE With 15 Best Questions of IIT-JEE
Challenging Problems in Physics,, Chemistry & Maths
Key Concepts & Problem Solving strategy for IIT-JEE.
Xtra Edge Test Series for JEE- 2012 & 2013






S

Success Tips for the Months

If you haven nothing else to do, look about
you and see if there is not something close
at hand that you can improve !
He has achieved success who has worked
well, laughed often, and loved much.
You always pass failure on the way to
success.
A journey of a thousand miles begins with
a single step.
Your success will be largely determined by
your ability to concentrates single-
mindedly on one thing at a time.
Success is a journey, not a destination.
Success comes in "Cans". Failure comes in
"Can't".
Success seems to be largely a matter of
hanging on after others have let go.

CONTENTS
INDEX PAGE



NEWS ARTICLE 3
IIT-B launches 'clean' energy laboratory
Tech tycoon Shiv Nadar to set up research-led
university in Greater Noida

IITian ON THE PATH OF SUCCESS 5
Mr. Krishnamurthy Rengarajan

KNOW IIT-JEE 6
Previous IIT-JEE Question

























XTRAEDGE TEST SERIES 46

Class XII IIT-JEE 2012 Paper
Class XI IIT-JEE 2013 Paper


AIEEE- 2011 Examination Paper with Solution 61

Regulars ..........


DYNAMIC PHYSICS 13
8-Challenging Problems [Set # 2]
Students Forum
Physics Fundamentals
Electrostatics-2
Newton's Law of motion

CATALYSE CHEMISTRY 28


Key Concept
Nomenclature & isomerism
Electro Chemistry
Understanding : Inorganic Chemistry


DICEY MATHS 36

Mathematical Challenges
Students Forum
Key Concept
Inverse Trigonometric Function
Quadratic Equation
Study Time........
Test Time ..........
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 3 JUNE 2011

IIT-B launches clean energy
laboratory
Mumbai: The Indian Institute of
Technology-Bombay on Thursday
launched a laboratory, set up in
association with Applied Materials
Inc, a global supplier for
manufacturing solutions for semi-
conductor and solar industries.
The scope of the Applied Materials
Chemistry Laboratory for Energy and
Nanoelectronics (CLEAN) will
include developing materials that
could be used for electronic and
renewable energy focused
applications, such as next generation
solar cells.
Under the first phase of collaboration,
Applied Materials supplied equipment
worth $7.5 million to IIT-B for a
semiconductor fabrication facility.
IIT-B director Devang Khakhar said,
CLEAN will begin a new phase of
the collaboration in areas related to
renewable energy.
This is a great example of the kind
of university and corporate
collaboration that is helping to
advance technology by enabling
world-class research, innovation and
workforce development, said Mike
Splinter, chairman of the board of
Applied Materials.
The inauguration marked the renewal
of its five-year relationship, during
which it endowed the institute with
$12 million as research grants.
Officials said as part of the Indo-US
collaboration in the sector, Applied
Materials will work with the
Jawaharlal Nehru National Solar
Mission (JNNSM). Our unique
collaboration will allow us to turn
material inventions into innovations,
said Omkaram Nalamasu, chief
technology officer, Applied Materials.
Tech tycoon Shiv Nadar to set up
research-led university in Greater
Noida
Shiv Nadar, the founder chairman of
major HCL Technologies, announced on
Monday that he would set up a research-
led multidisciplinary university at
Greater Noida, a satellite town of Delhi.
The Shiv Nadar University, named after
the IT billionaire, marks the
germination of an idea that was
incubated five years ago in the mind of
Nadar, who thought of the concept in
his zest to make a creative difference in
Indias educational system.
The University will be endowment-
led, research-driven with
multidisciplinary and interdisciplinary
approach, Nadar told. The total
endowment would be R1,000 crore.
Education is not a virgin territory for
Nadar. The Shiv Nadar Foundation runs
the VidyaGyan School at Bulandshahar
in Uttar Pradesh that aims at nurturing
talent and leadership amongst the
highly gifted rural poor children.
A visibly happy Nadar said with the
setting up of this University, he feels
the same excitement as was when HCL
was first formed in 1976. Nadar had
already committed a 10% of his wealth
for philanthropic causes. His total
worth has been estimated at around
R15,000 crore.
Nadar said an undergraduate student
spends close to $150,000-$200,000
seeking degrees on foreign shores and a
good chunk comes from North India.
At undergraduate levels one doesnt
get scholarships. The idea to create a
world class University at Greater Noida
was born out of this need.
It will offer courses in engineering,
social sciences, natural sciences,
schools of business and other
professional courses in due time. We
will start admissions from this
academic session itself and the total
intake this year would be around 200-
300 students, said Dr Nikhil Sinha,
the founding vice-chancellor of the
University. Sinha has served as
associate dean for academic affairs at
the University of Texas.

Nuclear plans get makeover
SAFETY FIRST Independent
regulator, reviews by external
experts on govt to-do list
Stunned by Fukushima and hit by
unprecedented anti-nuclear protests
in Jaitapur, the government
announced a series of dramatic
reforms to the country's nuclear
review mechanism that are aimed at
rebuilding public confidence in
India's ambitious nuclear
programme.

Soon, a one-shot cure for all
cancers
Universal Vaccine Uses Bodys
Own Defences To Stop All
Tumours In Their Tracks
London: Coming soon. Universal
cancer jab, say scientists who are
developing the vaccine which they
claim would stop all tumours in their
tracks. According to the scientists,
the jab is part of a new generation of
drugs that use the bodys own
defences to fight cancers like
pancreatic, prostate and breast,
stopping tumours in their tracks. The
jabs would hit the market in just two
years time, say the scientists.
Although vaccines usually prevent
disease, the Telo-Vac jab is designed
as a treatment. Rather than attacking
cancer cells, like many existing
drugs, it harnesses the power of the
immune system to fight the tumours,
they say. It works by encouraging the
immune system to seek out and
destroy an enzyme called telomerase.
Found at high levels in many cancer
cells, telomerase effectively makes
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 4 JUNE 2011
them fully immortal, allowing them to
live on when healthy cells would
die easing the growth and spread of
the tumour.
In the largest trial of its kind in the
UK, more than 1,000 men and women
in the late stages of pancreatic cancer
are either being given the vaccine
alongside their normal drugs or treated
as usual, the Daily Mail reported.
The results from the 53 hospitals
taking part will not be available until
next year but, anecdotally, some
patients credit their participation in the
trial with giving them an extra year or
two of life.
John Neoptolemos, who is co-
ordinating the large-scale British trial,
said: When you have got pancreatic
cancer, it is like a timebomb in
people. Pancreatic cancer cells are
normally invisible to the immune
system but the vaccine spots the
telomerase spilling out from them and
kickstarts the fight back.
Dr Jay Sangjae Kim, the founder of
GemVax, the Korean company
developing the TeloVac vaccine, said:
We s
trongly believe this has the potential
to overcome the limits of other current
cancer vaccines and become part of
the standard of care not only for
pancreatic cancer but for various other
types of cancers.

New engine sends shock waves
through auto industry
Prototype could potentially
decrease auto emissions up to 90
percent Despite shifting into higher
gear within the consumer's green
conscience, hybrid vehicles are still
tethered to the gas pump via a fuel-
thirsty 100-year-old invention: the
internal combustion engine.
However, researchers at Michigan
State University have built a prototype
gasoline engine that requires no
transmission, crankshaft, pistons,
valves, fuel compression, cooling
systems or fluids. Their so-called
Wave Disk Generator could greatly
improve the efficiency of gas-electric
hybrid automobiles and potentially
decrease auto emissions up to 90
percent when compared with
conventional combustion engines.
The engine has a rotor that's equipped
with wave-like channels that trap and
mix oxygen and fuel as the rotor spins.
These central inlets are blocked off,
building pressure within the chamber,
causing a shock wave that ignites the
compressed air and fuel to transmit
energy.
The Wave Disk Generator uses 60
percent of its fuel for propulsion;
standard car engines use just 15
percent. As a result, the generator is 3.5
times more fuel efficient than typical
combustion engines.
Researchers estimate the new model
could shave almost 1,000 pounds off a
car's weight currently taken up by
conventional engine systems.
Michigan State's team of engineers
hope to have a car-sized 25-kilowatt
version of the prototype ready by the
end of the year.

IITian from Sikar leaves Fortune
500 company to take up rural
welfare
From a government school at a
nondescript village in Sikar district to
IIT-Kgp, this youngster has come a
long way. Born to a humble farmer's
family, Rohit Garhwal now cherishes a
dream of developing an international
platform for the traditional agriculture
art & craft forms and agriculture and
minimise the exodus of rural talent to
cities.
To achieve his dream, the 25-year-old
has quit plush jobs at an MNC and an
NGO to study at the IIM-A.
"IIM-A offers incubation centre for
social ventures. Here, I will like to
construct a model of branding products
made by villagers and taking them in
international markets," said Rohit, who
has secured a seat in the most
prestigious management school, the
result of which was announced on
Friday afternoon.
Leaving behind the luxuries of an MNC
job earned after receiving a degree in
aerospace engineering from the most
sought after IIT at Kharagpur, Rohit
has taken the first big leap towards
translating his dream into reality by
securing the seat.
He had already started the
groundwork travelling daily from
one dusty village to another on the
state roadways bus to the hinterland
of Sikar, presiding over small public
gatherings, explaining to the
villagers the need for education and
healthcare to alleviate their social
and economic status.
Rohit now plans to take his work to a
higher level after completing his
IIM-A course.
An alumnus of the IIT-Kgp 2008
batch, Rohit was employed by a
financial firm listed in Fortune 500
companies. He called it quits a year
later worn out by the daily rigours of
explaining and devising business
models.
Back home, the IITian, being from a
farming background and a strong
advocator of inclusive growth,
ventured in social entrepreneurship.
He joined as consultant of an NGO
Helplads.
Using his technical skill, Rohit
organised workshops on themes
ranging from the basics of a
computer to robotics for village
children. "I plan fund-raising
activities along with developing
business models for small-time social
entrepreneurs in this region," Rohit
said.
Inspired by other IIM students
who have turned entrepreneurs,
he said he was determined to
find a way to help the rural
people. "I am very worried of
the migration of villagers to
small towns and cities
abandoning their agricultural
and traditional art and craft
practices. I would like to use my
technical expertise and
management tools to create a
self-reliant environment for
them," Rohit added.


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 5 JUNE 2011




































Knowledge is indeed wealth. Who better exemplifies it
than Krishnamurthy Rengarajan, IIT-B gold medallist
(B Tech dual-degree course). Krishnamurthy's story is that
of hard work, sheer grit and determination.
His undying passion for learning and excellence has paid
off. Coming from a lower middle class background ,
Krishnamurthy has made his parents proud when he passed
with flying colours.
His father, who works as a typist at Bharatiya Vidya
Bhavan is overwhelmed by his son's achievement.
Rengarajan, who hails from Tamil Nadu, came to Mumbai
28 years ago and settled down in a distant Mumbai suburb
of Dombivli. Though the family went through a lot of
hardships initially, he made sure that his children were
well educated.
"My son always wanted to join the IIT. When people
asked him what if you don't get through the entrance
examinations, he used to say, `there is no question of me
not clearing the test,'" says his proud father.
And, of course, he did top all the five years at IIT, a result
of sheer hard work and brilliance, says his mother, barely
able to control her excitement. "I am very happy for him,"
says Radha Rengarajan. Krishnamurthy did his schooling
at the Kidland School in Dombivli and pre-degree from V
G Vaze College at Mulund. His favourite subject being
mathematics it was obvious that he would pursue a degree
in engineering.
He won the Rakesh Mathur award of Rs 1 lakh (Rs
100,000) during his third year and other scholarships
throughout the four years.
Here's what Krishnamurthy had to say on his IIT
experience.
My IIT experience
The five years I spent at IIT were the best in my life. I will
cherish each and every moment here. I loved everything
here: the professors are the best one can ever get, the
facilities to study and the extra-curricular activities are
excellent. I made best of friends and thoroughly enjoyed
my college life.
I don't think I will ever get this experience anywhere else.
On studies
Before joining IIT, I used to study for 7 to 8 hours daily.
After joining IIT, I used to spend about a couple of hours. I
did not go for anything coaching classes. I learnt through
Brilliant Tutorial correspondence course and my
preparation began after I finished my 10th standard.
Why IIT
IIT is one of the premier institutes in India. I always
wanted to get good higher education, so I opted for IIT.
My mantra for success
There is no short cut to success. One has to work very
hard, put in a lot of effort, should have a problem-solving
mentality and a right approach to every problem.
My parents always stood by me, their support has been
invaluable and am overwhelmed.
Advice to IIT aspirants
Work hard. You have to spend a lot of time preparing as
exams are getting more and more competitive. You must
also have problem-solving skills.
Next move
"I have been selected for the scholarship programme at
Stanford University for a PhD in operations research. I
would like to research on optimising computer networks
and operation systems.
Will you come back to India?
I have been good in studies from my childhood. But
preparation for JEE is altogether different from earlier
studies. It is all about conceptual clarity rather than
cramming. So I always focussed on concepts and
supplemented it with required no. of problems.
My advice to all the IIT is aspirants out there is: Believe in
your capabilities and never under estimate yourself.



Success Story
Success Story
This article contains story/interviews of persons who succeed after graduation from different IITs
Mr. Krishnamurthy Rengarajan
IIT-B Gold Medallist
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 6 JUNE 2011















PHYSICS


1. Block A of mass m and block B of mass 2m are
placed on a fixed triangular wedge by means of a
massless, in extensible string and a frictionless
pulley as shown in figure. The wedge is inclined at
45 to the horizontal on both sides. The coefficient
of friction between block A and the wedge is 2/3
and that between block B and the wedge is 1/3. If
the system A and B is released from rest, find
[IIT-1997]

A
m
45 45
2m
B

(i) the acceleration of A,
(ii) tension in the string, and
(ii) the magnitude and direction of the force of
friction acting on A
Sol.
AW
=
3
2
;
BW
=
3
1



A
mg
45 45
2
mg 2
N
B

B
N
A

T
T
2
mg 2
2
mg
2
mg
2mg

Diagram shows the various forces acting on the
masses and their resolution in the direction of
motion.
Let us consider the two masses to be a system. The
forces trying to move the system, such that A moves
upwards and B moves downwards
=
2
mg 2

2
mg
=
2
mg

The forces trying to stop this motion (maximum
frictional force)
= f
A
+ f
B
=
A
N
A
+
B
N
B

=
3
2

2
mg
+
3
1

2
mg 2
=
2
mg
3
4

Since the stopping force is more therefore the mass
system will not move.
acceleration of the system is zero.
(ii) Taking equilibrium of B into consideration
Since,
2
mg 2
>
B
N
B

(

=
2
mg 2
3
1
N
B B

The difference of this force is provided by the
force of tension
T =
2
mg 2

3
1
2
mg 2
=
3
2

2
mg 2
=
3
mg 2 2

(iii) T =
3
mg 2 2
in upwards direction; weight
component
2
mg
in downward direction.
Since T >
2
mg

The frictional force will act in downward
direction
f = T
2
mg
=
3
2 2
mg
2
mg
=
2 3
3 4
mg =
2
mg


2. A uniform thin rod of mass M and length L is standing
vertically along the y-axis on a smooth horizontal
surface, with its lower end at the origin(0, 0). A slight
disturbance at t = 0 causes the lower end to slip on the
smooth surface along the positive x-axis, and the rod
starts falling. [IIT-1993]
(i) What is the path followed by the centre of mass of
the rod during its fall?
(ii) Find the equation of the trajectory of a point on the
rod located at a distance r from the lower end. What
is the shaper of the path of this point?
Sol. (i) Let the position of the rod at any instant be as
shown in the figure at any instant. Let the end point
of the rod have dimensions(x, 0) and (0, y) and rod
making an angle with the x-axis as shown in the
figure.

B
(0,y)
N
C
M
O
(x, 0)
A
L/2
L/2


CBN is similar to ABO

CB
CN
=
AB
AO

2 / L
CN
=
L
x

KNOW IIT-JEE
By Previous Exam Questions
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 7 JUNE 2011
CN = L/2
Also ACM is similar to ABO

CA
CM
=
BA
BO

2 / L
CM
=
2
y

The co-ordinates of C (centre of mass) are
|
.
|

\
|
2
y
,
2
x

Also x
2
+ y
2
= L
2
[in ABO] using pythagorous
theorem]

2 2
2
y
2
x
|
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|
=
2
2
L
|
.
|

\
|

Motion of c.m. is a circular path of radius
2
L

and the centre of the circle is at origin.
(ii) Let us consider a point P(x, y) at a distance r
from A and q be the inclination of rod AB with x-
axis at any arbitraty instant of time t.
cos =
r L
x
(In BPN)
sin =
r
y
(in APM)
But cos
2
+ sin
2
= 1

2
R L
x
|
.
|

\
|
+
2
r
y
|
.
|

\
|
= 1

3. Three particles A, B and C, each of mass m, are
connected to each other by three massless rigid rods to
form a rigid, equilateral triangular body of side l. This
body is placed on a horizontal frictioness table
(x-y plane) and is hinged to it at the point A so that it
can move without friction about the vertical axis
through A (see figure). The body is set into rotational
motion on the table about A with a constant angular
velocity .
[IIT-2002]

C B

F
l
A
x
y


(a) Find the magnitude of the horizontal force
exerted by the hinge on the body.
(b) At time T, when the side BC is parallel to the
x-axis, a force F is applied on B along BC (as
shown). Obtain the x-component and the
y-component of the force exerted by the hinge on
the body, immediately after time. T.
Sol. The mass B is moving in a circular path centred at
A. The centripetal force (ml
2
) F'. Therefore a force
F' acts on a (the hinge) which is equal to ml
2
. The
same is the case for mass C. Therefore the net force
in the hinge is
F
net
= 60 cos ' F ' F 2 ' F ' F
2 2
+ +
F
net
=
2
1
' F 2 ' F 2 ' F 2
2 2 2
+ = ' F 3 = 3 ml
2


C B
l
A X
y
60
F'
F'
F
net

l
l

(b) The force F acting on B will provide a torque to
the system. This torque is
F
2
3 l
= I
F
2
3l
= (2ml
2
)
a =
l m
F
4
3

The total force acting on the system along x-
direction is F + (F
net
)
x

This force is responsible for giving an acceleration
a
x
to the system.

c.m
2
3
l

F

Therefore
F + (F
net
)
x
= 3m (a
x
) c.m.
= 3m
m 4
F
Q a
x
= r =
4
3
l m
F

3
l
=
4
F

=
4
F 3

(F
net
)
x
=
4
F

(Fnet)y remains the same as before = 3 ml
2
.

4. Two fixed equal, positive charges, each of magnitude
5 10
5
coul. are located at points A and B separated
by a distance of 5 m. An equal and opposite charge
moves towards them along the line COD, the
perpendicular bisector of the line AB. [IIT-1985]
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 8 JUNE 2011
A
+q
q
C
B
+q
O
D

The moving charge, when it reaches the point C at a
distance of 4 m from O, has a kinetic energy of 4
joules. Calculate the distance of the farthest point D
which the negative charge will reach before returning
towards C.
Sol. Total energy of the system of three charges when the
charge q is at C
= P.E + K.E.
= 4
5
) q ( Kq
5
) q )( q ( K
6
q Kq
+
(

+ +

...(i)

D C
+q
+q
3m
3m 4m
5m
q
5m
B
A
x
2 2
3 x +

2 2
3 x +


Final energy of the system of three charges when q
is at D and momentarily at rest = P.E. + K.E.
=
(
(

+
+
+
+

2 2 2 2
3 x
) q ( Kq
3 x
) q ( Kq
6
q Kq

=
6
q Kq
=
2 2
3 x
) q ( Kq 2
+
...(ii)
By the principle of conservation of energy from (i)
and (ii) we get

6
q kq
+
5
) q ( kq 2
= 4 =
6
q kq
+
2 2
3 x
) q ( kq 2
+

2 = kq
2
(
(

+
2 2
3 x
1

5
1


5 5 9
10 5 10 5 10 9
2

=
5
1

2 2
3 x
1
+


5 5 9
20

=
5
1

2 2
3 x
1
+


2 2
3 x
1
+
=
5
1

45
4
=
45
4 9
=
45
5
=
9
1

x
2
+ 9 = 91 x + 8.48 m

5. A circular ring of radius R with uniform positive
charge density per unit length is located in the y-z
plane with its centre at the origin O, A particle of mass
m and positive charge q is projected from the point
P(R 3 , 0,0) on the positive x-axis directly towards
O, with an initial speed v. Find the smallest (non-
zero) value of the speed v such that the particle does
not return to P. [IIT-1993]
Sol. Let the particle be at a distance x from the origin at a
point P at any instant. The electric field at P due to
charge on the circular ring is

P
x
q
v A
X
) 0 , 0 , R 3 (
Z
Y

E =
0
4
1

2 / 3 2 2
) x R (
x R 2
+

from P to X
Force acting on q at P
F = qE
Small amount of work done in moving the particle
toward O for an infinitsinally small distance dx
dW = Fdx
=
2 / 3 2 2
0
) x R (
xqdx R 2
4
1
+


The total work done
W =
0
4
q R 2

+
0
R 3
2 / 3 2 2
) x R (
xdx
...(i)
Now,

+
0
R 3
2 / 3 2 2
) x R (
xdx

Let R
2
+ x
2
= t
2xdx = dt
xdx =
2
dt


2 / 3
t 2
dt
=
(

t
2

2
1
=
t
1

=
0
R 3
2 2
x R
1

(
(

+

=
R
1
+
2 2
R 3 R
1
+
=
R
1
+
R 2
1
=
R 2
1

Substituting in (i) we get
W =
0
4
q R 2



R 2
1
=
0
4
q


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 9 JUNE 2011
This work done needs to be supplied by the kinetic
energy given to the charge initially.

2
1
mv
2
=
0
4
q

v =
m 2
q
0


This is the minimum velocity through which the
charge q must be projected to reach the origin.


CHEMISTRY


6. The equilibrium constant K
p
of the reaction
2SO
2
(g) + O
2
(g) 2SO
3
(g) is 900 atm
1
at 800
K. A mixture containing SO
3
and O
2
having initial
partial pressures of 1 atm and 2 atm, respectively, is
heated at constant volume to equilibrate. Calculate
the pressure of each gas at 800 K. [IIT- 1989]
Sol. Since to start with SO
2
is not present, it is expected
that some of SO
3
will decompose to give SO
2
and O
2

at equilibrium. If 2x is the partial pressure of SO
3
that
is decreased at equilibrium, we would have
2SO
2
(g) + O
2
(g) 2SO
3
(g)
t = 0 0 2 atm 1 atm
t
eq
2x 2 atm + x 1 atm 2x
Hence, K
p
=
) p ( ) p (
) p (
2 2
3
O
2
SO
2
SO
=
) x atm 2 ( ) x 2 (
) x 2 atm 1 (
2
2
+


= 900 atm
1

Assuming x << 2 atm, we get

) atm 2 ( ) x 2 (
) x 2 atm 1 (
2
2

= 900 atm
1

or
2
2
) x 2 (
) x 2 atm 1 (
= 1800
or
x 2
atm 1
1 = 42.43
or x =
43 . 43 2
1

atm = 0.0115 atm


Hence, p(SO
2
) = 2x = 0.023 atm;
p(O
2
) = 2atm + x = 2.0115 atm and
p(SO
3
) = 1 atm 2x = 0.977 atm

7. The oxides of sodium and potassium contained in a
0.5 g sample of feldspar were converted to the
respective chlorides. The weight of the chlorides thus
obtained was 0.1180 g. Subsequent treatment of the
chlorides with silver nitrate gave 0.2451 g of silver
chloride. What is the percentage of Na
2
O and K
2
O in
the mixture ? [IIT-1979]
Sol. Mass of sample of feldspar containing Na
2
O and
K
2
O = 0.5 g.
According to the question,
Na
2
O + 2HCl 2NaCl + H
2
O ..(1)
2 23 + 16 = 62g 2(23 + 35.5) = 117 g
K
2
O + 2HCl 2KCl + H
2
O ..(2)
2 39 + 16 = 94g 2(39 + 35.5) = 149 g
Mass of chlorides = 0.1180 g
Let, Mass of NaCl = x g
Mass of KCl = (0.1180 x)g
Again, on reaction with silver nitrate,
NaCl + AgNO
3
AgCl + NaNO
3
..(3)
23 + 35.5 = 58.5g 108 + 35.5 = 143.5g
KCl + AgNO
3
AgCl + KNO
3
...(4)
39 + 35.5 = 74.5g 108 + 35.5 = 143.5g
Total mass of AgCl obtained = 0.2451 g
Step 1. From eq. (3)
58.5 g of NaCl yields = 143.5 g AgCl
x g of NaCl yields =
5 . 58
5 . 143
x g AgCl
And from eq. (4),
74.5 g of KCl yields = 143.5 g of AgCl
(0.1180 x)g of KCl yields
=
5 . 74
5 . 143
(0.1180 x)g AgCl
Total mass of AgCl

5 . 58
5 . 143
x +
5 . 74
5 . 143
(0.1180 x) = 0.2451
which gives, x = 0.0342
Hence, Mass of NaCl = x = 0.0342 g
And Mass of KCl = 0.1180 0.0342 = 0.0838g
Step 2. From eq.(1),
117 g of NaCl is obtained from = 62 g Na
2
O
0.0342 g NaCl is obtained from
=
117
62
0.032 = 0.018 g Na
2
O
From eq. (2),
149 g of KCl is obtained from = 94 g K
2
O
0.0838 g of KCl is obtained from
=
149
94
0.0838 = 0.053 g K
2
O
Step 3. % of Na
2
O in feldspar =
5 . 0
018 . 0
100 = 3.6%
% of K
2
O in feldspar =
5 . 0
053 . 0
100 = 10.6 %

8. Compound (A) is a light green crystalline solid. It
gives the following tests :
(i) It dissolves in dilute H
2
SO
4
without evolving any
gas.
(ii) A drop of KMnO
4
is added to the above solution.
The pink colour disappears.
(iii) Compound (A) is heated strongly. Gases (B) and
(C) with pungent smell came out. A brown
residue (D) is left behind.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 10 JUNE 2011
(iv) The gas mixture (B) and (C) is passed into
dichromate solution. The solution turns green.
(v) The green solution from step (iv) gives a white
ppt. (E) with a solution of Ba(NO
3
)
2
.
(vi) Residue (D) from (v) is heated on charcoal in
reducing flame. It gives a magnetic substance.
Identify compounds (A) to (E) and predict all the
equations. [IIT-1980]
Sol. The fore said observations may be briefly
summarised as follows :
(a)
solid green Light
A
4 2
SO H . Dil

) A (
of Solution

4
KMnO
Pink colour disappears
(b) A


gas
smelling Pungent
C B + +
residue Brown
D
(c)
Solution
7 2 2
O Cr K
+ C B
Green solution

2 3
) NO ( Ba

. ppt White
E
(d)
residue Brown
D


coal Char
a magnetic substance
From the last step, one may conclude that brown
residue (D) (hence also compound (A)) must be a salt
of iron. Since (A) decolourises KMnO
4
solution
hence it should be a salt of Fe (II). The reactions
involved are given below.
MnO
4

+ 8H
+
+ 5e

Mn
2+
+ 4H
2
O
[Fe
2+
Fe
3+
+ e

] 5

Pink
4
MnO

+
Green
2
Fe 5
+
+ 8H
+

Colourless
2
Mn
+
+ 5Fe
3+
+ 4H
2
O
From observations of (b) and (c), one concludes that
compound (A) should be FeSO
4
as on heating, it
gives pungent gases SO
2
and SO
3
.

) A (
4
FeSO 2


) Brown (
) D (
3 2
O Fe +
) B (
2
SO +
) C (
3
SO
SO
2
, gas turns dichromate solution green due to
formation of green coloured sulphate of chromium
(III), the different equations are,
Cr
2
O
7
2
+ 14H
+
+ 6e

2Cr
3+
+ 7H
2
O
[SO
2
+ 2H
2
O 4H
+
+ SO
4
2
+ 2e

] 3
Cr
2
O
7
2
+ 3SO
2
+ 2H
+
2Cr
3+
+ 3SO
4
2
+ H
2
O
White ppt. (E) is of BaSO
4


Green
3 4 2
) SO ( Cr + 3Ba(NO
3
)
2

) E (
4
BaSO 3 + 2Cr(NO
3
)
3

Hence, (A) is FeSO
4
(B) is SO
2
(C) is SO
3
(D) is
Fe
2
O
3
and (E) is BaSO
4

9. An alkyl halide X, of formula C
6
H
13
Cl on treatment
with potassium t-butoxide gives two isomeric alkenes
Y and Z(C
6
H
12
). Both alkenes on hydrogenation give
2, 3-dimethyl butane. Predict the structures of X, Y
and Z. [IIT-1996]
Sol. The alkyl halide X, on dehydrohalogenation gives
two isomeric alkenes.

X
13 6
Cl H C
HCl ;
butoxide t K



12 6
H C
Z Y+
Both, Y and Z have the same molecular formula
C
6
H
12
(C
n
H
2n
). Since, both Y and Z absorb one mol of
H
2
to give same alkane 2, 3-dimethyl butane, hence
they should have the skeleton of this alkane.
Y and Z (C
6
H
12
)
Ni
H
2

CH
3
CH CH CH
3
CH
3

CH
3
2,3-dimethyl butane

The above alkane can be prepared from two alkenes
CH
3
C = C CH
3
CH
3 CH
3
2,3-dimethyl
butene-2
(Y)
and CH
3
CH C = CH
2
CH
3

CH
3
2,3-dimethyl
butene-1
(Z)

The hydrogenation of Y and Z is shown below :

CH
3
C = C CH
3
CH
3 CH
3
(Y)
H2
Ni
CH
3
CH CH CH
3
CH
3 CH
3



CH
3
CH C = CH
2
CH
3 CH
3
(Z)
H2
Ni
CH
3
CH CH CH
3
CH
3 CH
3

Both, Y and Z can be obtained from following alkyl
halide :
CH
3
C CH CH
3
CH
3 CH
3
2-chloro-2,3-dimethyl butane
(X)
K-t-butoxide
; HCl
CH
2
= C CH CH
3

CH
3 CH
3
Cl
+ CH
3
C = C CH
3
CH
3 CH
3
(Z) 20% (Y) 80%

Hence, X,

CH
3
C CH CH
3

CH
3 CH
3

Cl

Y,
CH
3
C = C CH
3

CH
3
CH
3

Z,
CH
3
CH C = CH
2

CH
3 CH
3






XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 11 JUNE 2011
10. An organic compound A, C
6
H
10
O, on reaction with
CH
3
MgBr followed by acid treatment gives
compound B. The compound B on ozonolysis gives
compound C, which in presence of a base gives 1-
acetyl cyclopentene D. The compound B on reaction
with HBr gives compound E. Write the structures of
A, B, C and E. Show how D is formed from C.
[IIT-2000]
Sol. The given reactions are as follows.

O
CH3MgBr
OMgBr
CH
3

H
+
H2O
CH
3
HBr
CH
3
Br
(A)
(B) (E)
CH
3
O

O

COCH
3
O

Base
COCH
3
(D) (C)

The conversion of C into D may involve the
following mechanism.


COCH
3
(C)
CH
2 O

BH
+
B
+
COCH
3
HC
O

COCH
3
HC
O

B
BH
+
COCH
3
OH

BH
+
+B

COCH
3
OH


OH

COCH
3
(D)


MATHEMATICS


11. If one of the vertices of the square circumscribing the
circle |z 1| = 2 is 2 + i 3 . Find the other
vertices of square. [IIT-2005]
Sol. Here, centre of circle is (1, 0) is also the mid-point
of diagonals of square


z
1
(2, 3 )
(1, 0)
x
z
4

z
2
z
0

z
3

y


2
2 1
z z +
= z
0

z
2
= i 3 , (where z
0
= 1 + 0 i)
and
1
1
1
3
z
z
= e
i/2

z
3
= 1 + (1 + i 3 ). |
.
|

\
|

2
sin
2
cos i ,
as z
1
= 2 + i 3
= 1 i(1 + i 3 )
= (1 m 3 ) i
z
3
= (1 3 ) + i and z
4
= (1 + 3 ) i

12. If M is a 3 3 matrix, where M
T
M = I and det (M) = 1,
then prove that det (M I) = 0. [IIT-2004]
Sol. As, M
T
M = I and |M| = 1
|M
T
M| = | I |
|M
T
M| = |M| {as | I | = 1 = |M|}
|M
T
| |M| |M| = 0
|M| (|M
T
| 1) = 0
|M| = 0 or |M
T
| = 1 {neglecting |M| = 0}
|M
T
| = 1 ...(i)
|M I| = |M I| |M
T
| = |MM
T
M
T
|
= |I M
T
| = |M
T
I|
= |M I|
T

|M I| + |M I| = 0
|M I| = 0

13. A function f : R R satisfies the equation
f (x + y) = f (x) f (y) for all x, y in R and f (x) 0 for any
x in R. Let the function be differentiable at x = 0 and
f ' (0) = 2. Show that f '(x) = 2 f (x) for all x in R. Hence,
determine f (x). [IIT-1990]
Sol. We have, f(x + y) = f (x). f (y) for all x, y R.
f (0) = f (0). f (0) f (0) {f (0) 1} = 0
f (0) = 1 {Q f (0) 0}
Now, f '(0) = 2
h
f h f
h
) 0 ( ) 0 (
lim
0
+

= 2

h
h f
h
1 ) (
lim
0
= 2 {Q f (0) = 1}

f '(x) =
h
x f h x f
h
) ( ) (
lim
0
+


=
h
x f h f x f
h
) ( ) ( ). (
lim
0
,
{using f (x + y) = f (x). f(y)}
= f (x) .
(

h
h f
h
1 ) (
lim
0

= 2 f (x)
f ' (x) = 2 f (x)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 12 JUNE 2011
or
) (
) ( '
x f
x f
= 2 ; integrating both sides between 0 to x,
we get

x
dx
x f
x f
0
) (
) ( '
= 2x
log |f (x)| log |f (0)| = 2x
log
e
|f (x)| = 2x,
{as, f (0) = 1 log|f (0)| = 0}
f (x) = e
2x


14. Let O(0, 0), A(2, 0) and B(1,
3
1
) be the vertices of a
triangle. Let R be the region consisting of all those
points P inside OAB which satisfy d(P, OA) min
{d(P, OB), d(P, AB)}, when d denotes the distance
from the point to the corresponding line. Sketch the
region R and find its area. [IIT-1997]
Sol. Let the coordinate of P be (x ,y)

O
y
(0, 0)
P
A(2, 0)
x
B(1, 1/ 3 )

Equation of line OA be y = 0
Equation of line OB be 3 y = x
Equation of line AB be 3 y = 2 x
d(P, OA) = distance of P from line OA = y
d(P, OB) distance of P from line OB =
2
| 3 | x y

d(P, AB) = distance of P from line
AB =
2
| 2 3 | x y +

Given : d(P, OA) min. {d(P, OB), d(P, AB)}
y min.

+
2
2 3 |
,
2
| 3 | x y x y

y
2
| 3 | x y
and y
2
| 2 3 | x y +

Case I : y
2
| 3 | x y
, {since 3 y x < 0}
y
2
3 y x

(2 + 3 ) y x.
y x tan 15
Case II : If y
2
| 2 3 | x y +

2y 2 x 3 y [i.e. 3 y + x 2 < 0]
(2 + 3 )y 2 x
y tan 15. (2 x)
from above discussion P moves in side the as
shown,

O
y
(0, 0)
Q
A(2, 0)
x
B(1, 1/ 3 )
C
(1, 0)

Area of shaded region
= area of OQA
=
2
1
(base) height
=
2
1
(2) (tan 15) = tan 15
= (2 3 ) sq. units

15. Circle with radii 3, 4 and 5 touch each other externally
if P is the point of intersection of tangents to these
circles at their points of contact. Find the distance of P
from the point of contact. [IIT-2005]
Sol. As the circles with radii 3, 4 and 5 touch each other
externally and P is the point of intersection of
tangents

R
C
3

3 3
4
4
C
2 C
1

5
5
A

P is incentre of C
1
C
2
C
3
.
Thus distance of point P from the points of contact
= In radius (r) of C
1
C
2
C
3
.
i.e., r =
s

=
s
c s b s a s s ) )( )( (

where 2s = 7 + 8 + 9
s = 12
Hence, r =
12
) 9 12 )( 8 12 )( 7 12 (
=
12
3 . 4 . 5
= 5

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 13 JUNE 2011

























1. Initially the capacitor is uncharged, the switch is put
to position 1. t
1
sec later charge on the capacitor is
C 9 . After steady state is reached the switch is put
to position 2. t
1
sec. later charge on the capacitor is
C 3 . The capacitance of the capacitor is
C
S
1
2
4 V

(A) 1.5 F (B) 3 F
(C) 6 F (D) 3.37 F

2. A pure inductor is connected across a battery with
no internal resistance. The graph of current (i) Vs
time (t) is best represented by

(A)
i
t
(B)
i
t


(C)
i
t

(D)
i
t


3. When two identical voltmeters are connected so as
to measure the potential difference across the
resistors of 3 and 8 respectively, their readings
are same. The resistance of each voltmeter is

2 R 8
5
3

(A) 72 (B) 76
(C) 80 (D) 88

4. A circular loop is placed near a long straight current
carrying wire
i

Column I Column II
(A) Induced current in (P) i is increased
loop is in clockwise direction shown
direction
(B) Induced current in (Q) wire with constant
loop is in anticlockwise i moved away
direction from loop
(C) wire will repel loop (R) i is decreased in
the direction
shown
(D) wire will attract loop (S) loop is moved
towards the wire
(T) Direction of
current i is
reversed and
then it is further
decreased.


This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in physics that would be very helpful in facing IIT
JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and we
hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Dev Sharma
Director Academics, Jodhpur Branch
Physics Challenging Problems
Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n next i ssue
Set # 2
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 14 JUNE 2011
Passage # (Q. No. 5 to Q. No. 7)
A loudspeaker system uses alternating current to
amplify sound of certain frequencies. It consists
of 2 speakers.
C
v
0
sin(t)
~
woofer
L
Tweeter

Tweeter-which has smaller diameter produces high
frequency sounds. Woofer which has large diameter
produces low frequency sound. For purpose of
circuit analysis, we can take both speakers to be of
equal resistance R. The equivalent circuit is show in
the figure. The 2 speakers are connected to the
amplifier via capacitance and inductance
respectively. The capacitor in tweeter branch blocks
the low frequency sound but passes the high
frequency. The inductor in woofer branch does the
opposite.
5. Which plot correctly represents r.m.s. current
against frequency
(A)
Woofer
Tweeter
f
I

(B)
Woofer
Tweeter
f
I

(C)
Woofer
Tweeter
f
I
(D)
Woofer
Tweeter
f
I





















6. What is the frequency which is sounded equally
loudly by both speakers
(A)
LC
1
L
R
2
1
2
2

(B)
LC
1
L
R 4
2
1
2
2


(C)
2
2
L 4
R
LC
1
2
1

(D) LC
2
1



7. For a combination of L, R and C the current in
woofer and tweeter are always found to have a phase
difference of
2

. What is the relation between L, R


and C
(A) L = 2R
2
C (B) C R 2 L
2
=
(C) L = R
2
C (D)
2
C R
L
2
=

8. The four terminal network shown in the figure,
consists of four equal resistors and is a part of a
larger circuit. The points A, B and C are at same
potential. The potential difference between A and D is
40V. Find the potential difference between O and D.
A
B D
C
O
r
r
r
r






















Regents Physics
You Should Know Electricity

1. A coulomb is charge, an amp is current
[coulomb/sec] and a volt is potential difference
[joule/coulomb].
2. Short fat cold wires make the best conductors.
3. Electrons and protons have equal amounts of
charge (1.6 x 10-19 coulombs each).
4. Adding a resistor in parallel decreases the total
resistance of a circuit.
5. Adding a resistor in series increases the total
resistance of a circuit.
6. All resistors in series have equal current (I).
7. All resistors in parallel have equal voltage (V).
8. If two charged spheres touch each other add the
charges and divide by two to find the final
charge on each sphere.
9. Insulators contain no free electrons.
10. Ionized gases conduct electric current using
positive ions, negative ions and electrons.
11. Electric fields all point in the direction of the
force on a positive test charge.
12. Electric fields between two parallel plates are
uniform in strength except at the edges.
13. Millikan determined the charge on a single
electron using his famous oil-drop experiment.
14. All charge changes result from the movement of
electrons not protons (an object becomes positive
by losing electrons)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 15 JUNE 2011


























































1. Dipole moment =
2
L

And torque on dipole
Wx L E = =

Option [C] is correct
2. Conceptual
Option [B] is correct

3. Option [A] is correct
4. Final current is
R
V
that distributes in inverse ratio
to inductance.
Option [C] is correct

5. Option [B] is correct

6. Option [B] is correct
Transitions emitting photons of energy more than
work function W = 2.3eV can result in a
photoelectric.

max
min
mK 2
h
mK 2
h
p
h
= = =

K
max
= 13.6 0.85
























7. Option [C] is correct

8. Option [C] is correct
Acceleration =
mass pulled
force pulling Net


2
s / m 10 g
m
qE
m
mg qE
= =

=

at 0.5 sec v = 5 m/s
and
R
v B
mg qE
dt
dv
m
2 2
l
=

a = 20 10 10 = 0

dt
v 2 10
dv
v 2 10
dt
dV
=

=


] e 3 1 [ 5 v
) 4 t 2 (
+ =






















Solution
Physics Challenging Problems
Set # 1
8
Quest i ons were Publ i shed i n May Issue
THE BRAND NEW EMOTIONAL ROBOT

Most of the people always think, the robots are only the machines that didnt have any feeling.
Its definitely impossible for the scientists to apply emotion on the robots.
Well, please dont be so sure about your thought yet, as the scientists at Georgia Tech had
decided to test our ability to interpret a robots emotion. The research group discovered that
older adults showed some unexpected differences in the way they read a robots face from the
way younger adult did.
Jenay Beer, a graduate student in Georgia Techs School of Psychology described that the home-based assistive
robots have the potential to help older adults, as they can be used to keep the older adults independent longer. As a
result, it reduces healthcare needs and provides everyday assistance to the elders.
Based on the previous research, the robot found out that older adults are less accurate in recognizing anger, fear and
happiness. Furthermore, the older adults have problem recognizing the happy robot compared with their success in
recognizing happy people.
Another interesting fact about the experiment was the researchers discovered that neither the young nor old could
easily distinguish the emotion disgust on the virtual iCat. It might be due to the difficulty in programming a robot to
show the emotion!
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 16 JUNE 2011












1. Two blocks of mass m
1
and m
2
are attached at the
ends of an ideal spring of force constant K and
natural length l
0
. The system rests on a smooth
horizontal plane. Blocks having mass m
1
and m
2
are
pulled apart by applying force F
1
and F
2
respectively
as shown in figure. Calculate maximum elongation of
the spring.

F
2
F
1

m
1
m
2

K


Sol. Let at an instant, displacement of m
2
be x
2

(rightwards) and that of m
1
be x
1
(rightwards) and let
x
2
> x
1
.
Elongation of spring at this instant is x = (x
2
x
1
)
But (x
2
x
1
) is displacement of m
2
relative to m
1
.
Let rightward acceleration of two blocks at this
instant be a
1
and a
2
,
Considering the free body diagrams, as shown in
figure


m
1
.a
1

Kx
N
1

F
1

m
1
g


m
2
.a
2
F
2
N
2
F
1

m
2
g

Considering horizontal forces,
Kx F
1
= m
1
a
1
or a
1
=
1
1
m
F Kx

F
2
Kx = m
2
a
2
or a
2
=
2
2
m
Kx F

Acceleration of m
2
relative to m
1
is a = a
2
a
1

or a =
2
2
m
Kx F

1
1
m
F Kx

=
2 1
1 2 2 1
m . m
F m F m +
Kx
|
|
.
|

\
| +
2 1
2 1
m m
m m

But a =
dx
dy
v where v = velocity of m
2
relative to m
1
.
At initial moment, elongation x = 0 and v = 0. At the
instant of maximum elongation velocities of two
blocks are identical or at x = x
max
, v = 0.

=
=
0 v
0 v
du v =

=
(
(

|
|
.
|

\
| + +
max
x
0 x
2 1
2 1
2 1
1 2 2 1
x K
m . m
m m

m . m
F m F m
dx
or 0=
2 1
1 2 2 1
m . m
F m F m +
(x
max
0)

|
|
.
|

\
| +
2 1
2 1
m . m
m m
) 0 x (
2
K
2
max

or x
max
=
K
2
.
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
+
2 1
1 2 1
m m
F m F m
Ans.

2. One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin
O and axis of spring is parallel to x-axis. A block of
mass m = 1 kg is attached to free end of the spring
and its is performing SHM. Equation of position of
the block in co-ordinate system shown in figure is x =
10 + 3. sin (10.t),t is in second and x in cm.
Another block of mass M = 3 kg, moving towards the
origin with velocity 30 cm/sec collides with the block
performing SHM at t = 0 and gets stuck to it
Calculate

3 Kg 1 Kg
x
O

(i) new amplitude of oscillations,
(ii) new equation for position of the combined body
and
(iii) loss of energy during collision. Neglect friction.
Sol. Natural length of the spring is 10 cm and force
constant of the spring is K = 100 Nm
1
.
Just before collision, velocities of 1 kg block and
3 kg block are (+ 0.30 ms
1
) and ( 0.30 ms
1
)
respectively. Let velocity of combined body just after
collision be v, then, according to law of conservation
of momentum, (1 + 3) v = 1 (0.30) + 3 ( 0.30)
or v = 0.15 ms
1
.
Negative sign indicates that combined body starts to
move leftward. But at the instant of collision spring is
in its natural length or combined body is in
equilibrium position. Hence at t = 0, phase of
combined body becomes equal to .
Now angular frequency of oscillations of combined
body is
Experts Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
Students' Forum
PHYSI CS
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 17 JUNE 2011
' =
M m
K
+
=
3 1
100
+
= 5 rad sec
1
.
New amplitude of oscillations is
a' =
'
| v |

=
5
15 . 0
= 0.3 m or 3 cm Ans. (i)
Equation for position x of combined body is
given by
x = l
0
+ a' sin('t + )
or x = 10 + 3 sin (5t + ) cm
or x = 10 3 sin (5t) cm Ans. (ii)
Kinetic energy of two blocks (Just before collision)
=
2
1
m(0.3)
3
+
2
1
M(0.3)
2
= 0.18 joule
Kinetic energy of combined body (just after collision)
=
2
1
(m + M) v
2
= 0.045 Joule
Loss of energy, during collision
= 0.18 0.045 joule
= 0.135 joule Ans.(iii)

3. A small sphere is charged uniformly and placed at
point A(u, v) so that at point B(8, 7) electric field
strength is

E = (54
^
i + 72
^
j ) NC
1
and potential is +
900 volt. Calculate
(i) magnitude of charge,
(ii) co-ordinates of point A, and
(iii) if di-electric strength of air is 3 10
6
Vm
1
,
minimum possible radius of the sphere.
Sol. Since, potential due to sphere is positive, therefore, it
is positively charged. Let magnitude of charge on
sphere be q and let distance AB be equal to r.
Potential at B, V = 9 10
9
2
r
q
= 900 volt ...(i)
Magnitude of Electric field at B is E
= 9 10
9
2
r
q
=
2 2
72 54 + NC
1

or 9 10
9
2
r
q
= 90 NC
1
...(ii)
Dividing equation (i) by (ii) r = 10 m
Substituting this value in equation (i),
q = 10
6
coulomb or 1C Ans. (i)
Since q is a positive charge, therefore

AB||

E or
| AB |
AB

=
| E |
E


or
r
j ) v 7 ( i ) u 8 (
^ ^
+
=
90
j 72 i 54
^ ^
+

or (8 u)
^
i + (7 v)
^
j = 6
^
i + 8
^
j
u = 2 and v = 1
or Co-ordinates of point A are (2, 1) Ans. (ii)
Since, minimum radius of sphere corresponds to
electric field strength at surface of sphere to be equal
to dielectric strength of air.
Therefore radius R of sphere is given by,
9 10
9

2
R
q
= 3 10
6
Vm
1

R = m 10 3
3
= 30 cm = 5.48 cm Ans. (iii)

4. A steady beam of -particles travelling with kinetic
energy E = 83.5 keV carries current of I = 0.2 A.
(i) If this beam strikes a plane surface at an angle
= 30 with normal to the surface, how many
-particles strike the surface in t = 4 second?
(ii) How many -particles are there in length l = 20 cm
of the beam?
(iii Calculate power of the source used to accelerate
these -particles from rest.
(Mass of -particle = 6.68 10
27
kg)
Sol. Since, current is rate of flow of charge through a
section, there fore, a current I = 0.2 A means that a
charge 0.2 C is flowing per second.
Charge of an -particle = 2e = 3.2 10
19
C
Rate of flow of -particles,
n =
q
I
= 6.25 10
11
per second
Number of -particles striking against a surface in
t = 4 second
= n t = 6.25 10
11
4 = 2.5 10
12
Ans.(i)
(Note : There is no significance of angle for
calculation of number of -particles striking the
surface.)
Kinetic energy of each -particle is E = 83.5 ke V
or E = (83.5 10
3
) (1.6 10
19
) J
But E =
2
1
mv
2
where m = 6.68 10
27
kg
Velocity of -particles is v = 2 10
6
ms
1
.
It means a beam of length v = 2 10
6
m crosses a
section in one second. But number of -particles
passing through a section in one second is
n = 6.25 10
11

Number of -particles in unit length of the beam
=
v
n
= 3.125 10
5
per m.
Number of -particle in length l of beam =
v
n
l
= 6.25 10
4
Ans.(ii)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 18 JUNE 2011
Let potential difference of the source be V volt.
Kinetic energy of -particles accelerated by this
source,
E = qV or V =
q
E
= 41.75 kV
Power supplied by the source to accelerate
-particles,
P = VI = 8.35 10
3
watt Ans. (iii)

5. A two way switch S is used in the circuit shown in
Fig. First, the capacitor is charged by putting the
switch in position 1.


2
0.1F 1
S
60V
+
10
4
6
3
Calculate heat generated across each resistor when
switch is in position 2.
Sol. Initially the switch was in position 1. Therefore,
initially potential difference across capacitor was
equal to emf of the battery i.e. 60 volt.
Initially energy stored in the capacitor was
U =
2
1
CV
2
=
2
1
0.1 60
2
J
= 180 J
q
4
+
i
6
3
i
1
i
i
2

When switch is shifted to position 2, capacitor begins
to discharge and energy stored in it is dissipated in
the form of heat across resistances. Let at some
instant discharging current through the capacitor be i
as shown in Fig.
According to Kirchhoff's laws,
i
1
+ i
2
= i (1)
6i
1
3i
2
= 0 or i
2
= 2i
1
(2)
From above two equations,
i
1
=
3
i
and i
2
=
3
2
i
But thermal power generated in a resistance R is
P = i
2
R where i is current flowing through it.
Therefore, heat generated P
1
, P
2
and P
3
across 4,
6 and 3 resistances is in ration
2
2
2
1
2
i 3 : i 6 : i 4
or P
1
: P
2
: P
3
= 4 :
3
2
:
3
4
= 6 : 1 : 2
But total heat generated is P
1
+ P
2
+ P
3
= U
Heat generated across 4 is P
1
= 120 J Ans.
Heat generated across 6 is P
2
= 20 J Ans.
Heat generated across 3 is P
3
= 40 J Ans.
Since, during discharging, no current flows through
10, therefore heat generated across it is equal to
zero. Ans.










































Regents Physics
You Should Know Mechanics

1. Weight (force of gravity) decreases as you move
away from the earth by distance squared.
2. Mass and inertia are the same thing.
3. Constant velocity and zero velocity means the
net force is zero and acceleration is zero.
4. Weight (in newtons) is mass x acceleration
(w = mg). Mass is not weight!
5. Velocity, displacement [s], momentum, force
and acceleration are vectors.
6. Speed, distance [d], time, and energy (joules) are
scalar quantities.
7. The slope of the velocity-time graph is
acceleration.
8. At zero (0) degrees two vectors have a resultant
equal to their sum. At 180 degrees two vectors
have a resultant equal to their difference. From
the difference to the sum is the total range of
possible resultants.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 19 JUNE 2011















Electric Potential Energy:
If a point charge q
1
is present in an electric field
where potential is V, by definition
V = (U/q
1
)
i.e., U = q
1
V
And if the field is produced by a point charge q
2

which is at a distance r
12
from q
1
,
U =
(

12
2
0
1
r
q
4
1
q =
12
2 1
0
r
q q
4
1

(1)
So in case of discrete distribution of charges

|
|
.
|

\
|
+ +

= .......
r
q q
r
q q
4
1
U
23
3 2
12
2 1
0
=
j i
ij
j i
0
r
q q
4
1
2
1


Here it is worth noting


(a) Electrical potential energy is not localised but is
distributed all over the field

(b) If the electric potential energy of a system in one
configuration is U
1
and in the other U
F
, work done in
changing the configuration will be
W
IF
= U
IF
= (U
1
U
F
) = U
F
U
1

And as potential energy at infinity is zero, work done
in assembling or disassembling a given charge
distribution will be respectively,
W = U
F
[as U
1
= 0] and W = U
1
[as U
F
= 0]
(Assembling) (Disassembling)

Motion of a Charged Particle in an Electric Field
In case of motion of a charged particle in an electric
field :
(a) As by definition of electric intensity

E ,

F = q

E , a
point charge always experiences a force either at rest
or in motion.
(b) The direction of force is parallel to the field if the
charge is positive and opposite to the field if charge
is negative.

E

= E q F
+

E

= E q F


(A) (B)

(c) Electric field is conservative in an electric field work
is path independent and work done in moving a point
charge q between two fixed points having potential
difference V is equal to,
W
AB
= U
AB
= q(V
B
V
A
)qV (1)

And hence in moving a charged particle in an electric
field work is always done unless the points are at
same potential as shown in figure. [However, in
magnetic field as force is always perpendicular to
motion, work done is always zero.]


B
A
I
II
+q


+Q
L L
B A
I
II

B
II
I
+Q
A

(A) (B) (C)

(d) When a charged particle is accelerated by an electric
field (uniform or non-uniform) by Work energy
theorem, i.e., KE = W, we have

2 2
mu
2
1
m
2
1
= qV [as from Eq. (1) W = qV]
or =
(

+
m
qV 2
u
2
(2)
And if the charged particle is initially at rest, i.e.,
u = 0
=
m
qV 2
(3)
And if the field is uniform, i.e., E = (V/d)
=
m
qEd 2
(4)

(e) In case of motion of a charged particle in a uniform
electric field if force of gravity does not exist (or is
balanced by some other force

a =
m
F

=
m
E q

= constant [as

F = q

E ] (5)
So equation of motion are valid. Now there are two
possibilities:

(i) If the particle is initially at rest
From Eq. = u + at, we get
= at = t
m
qE

(

= =
m
qE
a and 0 u as (6)
Electrostatics-2
PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR IIT-JEE
KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 20 JUNE 2011
And from Eq. s = ut +
2
at
2
1

s =
2
at
2
1
=
2
t
m
qE
2
1
(7)
i.e., the motion is accelerated translatory with
a t
0
; t and s t
2
Further more in this situation :
W = KE =
2
1
m
2
=
2
1
m
2
t
m
qE
(

=
m
qEt
) 6 .( fromEq as

+
+
+
+
+
E
+






d
P D = V
+q
F

Which in the light of Eq. (7) with
s = d, gives
W = qEd = qV [as E = V/d] (8)

(ii) If the particle is projected perpendicular to the
field with an initial velocity
0

From Eq. = u + at and s = ut +
2
1
at
2
respectively
for motion along x-axis as u =
0
and a = 0,

x
=
0
= constt. and x =
0
t (9)
While for motion along y-axis as u = 0 and
a = (qE/m),

y
= t
m
qE
(

and y =
2
t
m
qE
2
1
(

(10)

+ + + + + + + +


y
L D
q
V
0

Y

So eliminating t between equation for x and y,
we have
y =
2
0
x
m 2
qE
(

=
2
0
m 2
qE

(11)
i.e., the path is a parabola.
[However, under same conditions in magnetic
field path is a circle.]
Electric Dipole
Definition: If two equal and opposite point
charges are separated by a distance 2l such that
the distance of field point r >>2l, the system is
called a dipole.
(a) Field of a Dipole
Potential due to dipole at a point (r, ) as shown
in Figure will be
V = V
1
+ V
2
=
(

2 1 0
r
q

r
q
4
1

=
(

2 1
2 1
0
r r
r r
4
q

2lcos
r2
r
r1
P
+q q
l l


Now as , r >> 2l
r
1
r
2
= r
2
and r
2
r
1
= 2l cos
So, V =
2
0
r
) cos 2 ( q
4
1

l

V =
2
0
r
cos P
.
4
1

[as p = q 2l] ] (1)


(b) Potential will be minimum when |cos | = min = 0,
i.e., = 90. So for broad on, equitorial or tan B
position, potential is minimum and is zero, i.e.,
V
min
= 0
This all is shown Figure


+q
B A
q
O P
r
Vmax =
2
0
r
P
4
1


Vmax =
3
0
r
P 2
4
1


End-on, Axial or
tan A position
(A)

+q
B A
q
O
P
Vmax = 0
Vmax =
3
0
r
P
4
1

Broad on, Equitorial


or tan B position
(B)

(c) Now as electric field,

E =

n
dx
dV

So component of electric intensity in the direction
of r :
E
r
=
(

2
0
r
cos p
4
1
dr
d
=
3
0
r
cos p 2
4
1

(i)
And perpendicular to r,
E

=
|
|
.
|

\
|

2
0
r
cos p
4
1
rd
d
=
3
0
r
sin p
4
1


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 21 JUNE 2011

(ii)
So that, tan =
2
1
E
E
r
=

tan
and, E =
2 2
r
E E

+ = ) cos 3 1 (
r
P
4
1
2
3
0
+


(2)
From this it is clear that :
(1) Intensity due to a dipole varies as (1/r
3
) and can
never be zero unless r or p 0.
(2) E will be maximum when cos
2
= max = 1, i.e.,
= 0, i.e., for end on, axial or tan A position E
is maximum and is,
E
max
=
3
0
r
p 2
4
1


(3) E will be minimum when cos
2
= min = 0, i.e.,
= 90, i.e., for broad on, equitorial or tan B
position E is minimum and is,
E
min
=
3
0
r
p
4
1


Conductor in Electrostatics
The substances such as metals which allow the
charge to flow freely through them are called
conductors. In metals conduction envolves the
movement of free electrons. In case of conductors in
electrostatics, it is worth noting that :
(a) In charging a conductor electrons are removed,
conductor becomes positively charged and its
potential increases and if added, it becomes
negatively charged and its potential decreases.
(b) When a conductor is charges by induction,
induced charge (Which is free to move) is equal
and opposite to the inducing charge, i.e.,q' = q
(c) Charge resides on the outer surface of a
conductor. However, distribution of charge on
the surface is generally not uniform and surface
density of charge varies inversly as the radius of
curvature of that part of the conductor, i.e.,
(1/R)
(d) The dielectric constant of conductors in
electrostatics is infinite, i.e., K =
(e) Electric intensity inside a conductor is zero
while outside (near its surface) is (/
0
), i.e.,
E
in
= 0 and E
out
= (/
0
)
(f) Conductor is an equipotential surface, i.e.,
potential at its surface or inside everywhere is
same, i.e., for a conductor
V = constt.
(g) Electric field and hence lines of force are
normal to the surface of a conductor.
(h) The field in a cavity inside a conductor is zero
resulting in 'electrostatic shielding.'

V
s
= v
in
= constt.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
0
2
2 ds
dF

=

0
out
E

=
E
0
= 0
Ein = 0

1
(>
2
)

2
(A) (B)





1. Three point charges q, 2q and 8q are to be placed on
a 9 cm long straight line. Find the position where the
charges should be placed such that the potential
energy of this system is minimum. In this situation,
what is the electric field at the position of the charge
q due to the other two charges ?
Sol. As potential energy of two point charges separated by
a distance r is given by U(=q
1
q
2
/4
0
r), so to have
minimum potential energy the charges of greater
value should be farthest, i.e., q must be between 2q
and 8q. Let q be at a distance x from 2q, then
potential energy of the system will be
U =
(


+ +
d
q 2 q 8
) x d (
qq 8
x
qq 2
4
1
0

For U to be minimum (dU/dx) = 0 ]
i.e.,
2
2
2
2
) x d (
q 8
x
q 2
+ = 0

2q
q
8q
x (dx)
d

i.e., 2x = (d x) or x = (d/3) = (9/3) = 3 cm
So to have minimum potential energy, the charge q
must be placed at a distance of 3 cm from 2q between
2q and 8q on the line joining the charges. In this
situation, Field at q
E = 0
) 6 (
q 8

) 3 (
q 2
4
1
2 2
0
=
(
(

Ans.

2. Three point charges 1C, 2C and 3C are placed at the
corners of an equilateral triangle of side 1m.
Calculate the work required to move these charges to
the corners of a smaller equilateral triangle of side
0.5 m as shown in Figure (A)

B C
A
C B
A
1
(A)
3

Solved Examples
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 22 JUNE 2011
Sol. As potential energy of two charges separated by a
distance r is given by U = [q
1
q
2
/4
0
r], the initial and
final potential energy of the system will be
(U
S
)
I
=
(

1
1 3
1
3 2
1
2 1
4
1
0

= 9 10
9
11 = 9.9 10
10
J
(U
S
)
F
=
(

5 . 0
1 3
5 . 0
3 2
5 . 0
2 1
4
1
0

= 9 10
9
22 = 19.8 10
10
J
So work done in changing the configuration of the
system:
W = (U
S
)
F
(U
S
)
I
= (19.8 9.9) 10
10

= 9.9 10
10
J Ans.

3. A particle of mass 40 g and carrying a charge
5 10
9
C is moving directly towards fixed positive
point charge of magnitude 10
8
C. When it is at a
distance of 10 cm from the fixed point charge it has a
velocity of 50 cm/s. At what distance from the fixed
point charge will the particle come momentarily to
rest ? Is the acceleration constant during motion ?
Sol. If the particle comes to rest momentarily at a distance
r from the fixed charge, then from 'conservation of
energy' we have

2
mu 2
1
+
a
Qq
4
1
0

=
r
Qq
4
1
0


Substituting the given date, we get :
2
1
40 10
6

2
1

2
1
= 9 10
9
10
8
5 10
9
(

10
r
1

or
r
1
10 =
8
6
10 5 9
10 5

=
9
190

or
r
1
=
9
100
+ 10 =
9
100
m
i.e., r = 4.7 10
2
m
As here, F =
2
0
r
qQ
4
1

So acc. =
m
F

2
r
1

i.e., acceleration is not constant during motion.

4. A very small sphere of mass 80 g having a charge q
is held at a height 9 m vertically above the centre of a
fixed conducting sphere of radius 1m, carrying an
equal charge q. When released it falls until it is
repelled just before it comes in contact with the
sphere. Calculate the charge q. [g = 9.8 m/s
2
]

+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+q A
9m
B
1m

Sol. Keeping in mind that here both electric and
gravitational potential energy are changing and for
external point a charged sphere behaves as whole of
its charge were concentrated at its applying
conservation of energy between initial and final
position, we have

9
qq
4
1
0

+ mg 9 =
1
q
4
1
2
0

+ mg 1
or q
2
=
9
3
10
8 . 9 10 80

q = 28 C Ans.

5. The distance between the two plates of a cathode-ray
oscillograph is 1 cm and potential difference between
them is 1200 volt. If an electron of energy 2000 eV
enters at right-angles to the field, what will be its
deflection if the plates be 1.5 cm long ?
Sol. As distance between the plates is 1 cm and potential
difference 1200 V, the field between the plates
E =
d
V
=
2
10 1
1200

= 1.2 10
5
m
V
(1)
+ + + + + +

y
L
e
V
0
E
x
d
a
y

So the electron will experience a force F
e
= eE
opposite to the field as shown in Figure and hence
acceleration of electron along y-axis:
a =
m
F
=
m
eE

= constt. ...(2)
So from equation of motion,
s = ut +
2
at
2
1

Along x-axis, L =
0
t [as a = 0] (3)
and along y-axis, y =
2
at
2
1
[as u = 0] (4)
Eliminating t, between Eqs. (3) and (4)
y =
2
0
u
L
a
2
1
(

=
2
0
2
mu
eEL
2
1

(

=
m
eE
a ) 2 ( . Eq from as
or y =
2
L
K
eE
4
1

(

=
2
0
m
2
1
K as
Substituting the given data and value of E from
Eq. (1),
y =
19
2 2 5 19
10 6 . 1 200
) 10 5 . 1 ( ) 10 2 . 1 )( 10 6 . 1 (
4
1



= 3.375 mm Ans.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 23 JUNE 2011











Newton's First Law (or Law of Inertia) :
A body continues to maintain its state of equilibrium
till disturbed by an unbalanced force i.e. it continues
to maintain its state of rest or of uniform motion till
an unbalanced external force disturbs it. This law is
also called Galileo Law or Law of Inertia.
Newton's second Law :
The rate of change of momentum is equal to the force
applied on the body and this change takes place in the
direction of force applied i.e.

F =
dt
p d
r

Newton's third law (Action-reaction law) :
To every action there is equal and opposite reaction
and both act on two different bodies.
Mathematically AB F

= BA F


or m
A
a
A
= m
B
a
B
(in magnitude)
i.e. for the same force acting on two bodies the
massive body has less acceleration than a light body.
Impulse :
If two bodies moving along a straight line collide,
then the collision is small and the force experienced
during collision on any of the two bodies varies with
time and has a large value. In such cases the net
effect of force can be measured with the help of a
physical quantity called Impulse.
since

F =
dt
p d
r
p d
r
=

F dt = I d
r

I
r
=

2
1
p
p
p d
r
= dt F
2
1
t
t

r

I
r
= dt F
2
1
t
t

r
=
2
p
1
p
So, Impulse = total change in momentum
Also called Impulse-Momentum theorem
Important :
Newton's second law is the real law of motion as the
First law and Third law can be derived form it.
The concept of impulse must be applied at those
places where an extremely large force acts on a body
for a very small time interval. Then, impulse is just
defined as the product of extremely large force with
the very small time value.
Impulse is a vector quantity having direction along
the force.
Equilibrium :
A body is said to be in the equilibrium state when
(a) no net force acts on the body
0 F
r r
=

(Condition for translational equilibrium)



x
F = 0
y
F = 0
z
F = 0
(b) no net torque acts on the body :
0 p
r
r
=

(condition for rotational equilibrium)


x
= 0

y
= 0

z
= 0
This statement is none other than law of conservation
of moments according to which the above condition
can be restated as

|
|
.
|

\
|
momentus
clockwise total
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
momentus
ise anticlockw total

Important : For Rotational Equilibrium

|
|
.
|

\
|
momentus
clockwise total
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
momentus
ise anticlockw total

Frames of Reference :
The system/co-ordinate system/a platform w.r.t.
which the position or the motion of a body is
determined is called a frame of reference. The
simplest frame of reference having all the properties
of a frame is the Cartesian co-ordinate
frame/system.
Frame of reference are of two types :
S.N. Inertial frame Non-Inertial frame
1. Newton's laws are valid
in the inertial frames.
Newton's Laws are not
valid in the non-inertial
frame. They are to be
modified by introducing
the concept of pseudo
force.
2. All non-accelerated
frames (frames at rest
or frames moving with
uniform velocity) are
inertial frames.
All accelerated frames
are non-inertial frames.
Newton's Law of motion
PHYSICS FUNDAMENTAL FOR IIT-JEE
KEY CONCEPTS & PROBLEM SOLVING STRATEGY
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 24 JUNE 2011
3. A particle moves with
uniform velocity in the
absence of an external
force.
In this frame of
reference the particle
doesn't move with
uniform velocity.
4. A frame of reference
moving with constant
velocity with respect to
an inertial frame is also
inertial.
A rotating frame of
reference is a non-
inertial frames and an
example for this is the
earth.

Concept of Pseudo force :
If a body of mass m is placed in a non-inertial frame
having acceleration
0
a
r
then it experiences a pseudo
force m
0
a
r
acting in a direction opposite to the
direction of
0
a
r
(the acceleration of non-inertial
frame). So,

pseudo
F
r
= m
0
a
r

where, negative sign indicates the pseudo force is
always directed in a direction opposite to the
direction of the acceleration of the frame.
While drawing free Body Diagrams (FBDs) in which
pseudo force is involved, we must first see the
acceleration of the non internal frame and then in the
FBD, plot the pseudo force with a value ma in a
direction opposite to the acceleration of non-inertial
frame.
y
x
m
F
pseudo
= ma
0

a
0

"No negative sign has then to be applied to the value
of pseudo force as its direction in the indicated
correctly".
Problem Solving strategy
Newton's First Law : Equilibrium of a Particle
Step 1 : Identify the relevant concepts : You must
use Newton's first law for any problem that involves
forces acting on a body in equilibrium. Remember
that "equilibrium" means that the body either remains
at rest or moves with constant velocity. For example,
a car is in equilibrium when it's parked, but also when
it's driving down a straight road at a steady speed.
If the problem involves more than one body, and the
bodies interact with each other, you'll also need to
use Newton's third law. This law allows you to relate
the force that one body exerts on a second body to the
force that the second body exerts on the first one.
Be certain that you identify the target variable(s).
Common target variables in equilibrium problems
include the magnitude of one of the forces, the
components of a force, or the direction of a force.
Step 2: Set up the problem using the following steps:
Draw a very simple sketch of the physical
situation, showing dimensions and angles. You
don't have to be an artist!
For each body that is in equilibrium, draw a free-
body diagram of this body. For the present, we
consider the body as a particle, so a large dot will
do to represent it. In your free-body diagram, do
not include the other bodies that interact with it,
such as surface it may be resting on, or a rope
pulling on it.
Now ask yourself what is interacting with the
body by touching it or in any other way. On your
free-body diagram, draw a force vector for each
interaction. If you know the angle at which a
force is directed, draw the angle accurately and
label it. A surface in contact with the body exerts
a normal force perpendicular to the surface and
possibly a friction force parallel to the surface.
Remember that a rope or chain can't push on a
body, but can only pull in a direction along its
length. Be sure to include the body's weight,
except in case where the body has negligible mass
(and hence negligible weight). If the mass is
given, use w = mg to find the weight. Label each
force with a symbol representing the magnitude
of the force.
Do not show in the free-body diagram any forces
exerted by the body on any other body. The sums
in Eq.

F
r
= 0 (particle in equilibrium, vector
form) and
x
F = 0;
y
F = 0 (particle in
equilibrium, component form) include only forces
that act on the body. Make sure you can answer
the question "What other body causes that force?"
for each force. If you can't answer that question,
you may be imagining a force that isn't there.
Choose a set of coordinate axes and include them
in your free-body diagram. (If there is more than
one body in the problem, you'll need to choose
axes for each body separately.) Make sure you
label the positive direction for each axis. This will
be crucially important when you take components
of the force vectors as part of your solution. Often
you can simplify the problem by your choice of
coordinate axes. For example, when a body rests
or sides on a plane surface, it's usually simplest to
take the axes in the directions parallel and
perpendicular to this surface, even when the plane
is tilted.
Step 3 : Execute the solution as follows :
Find the components of each force along of the
body's coordinate axes. Draw a wiggly line
through each force vector that has been replaced
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 25 JUNE 2011
by its components, so you don't count it twice.
Keep in mind that while the magnitude of a force
is always positive, the component of a force along
a particular direction may be positive or negative.
Set the algebraic sum of all x-components of
force equal to zero. In a separate equation, set the
algebraic sum of all y-components equal to zero.
(Never add x-and y-components in a single
equations.) You can then solve these equations
for up to two unknown quantities, which may be
force magnitudes, components, or angles.
If there are two or more bodies, repeat all of the
above steps for each body. If the bodies interact
with each other, use Newton's third law to relate
the forces they exert on each other.
Make sure that you have as many independent
equations as the number of unknown quantities.
Then solve these equations to obtain the target
variables. This part is algebra, not physics, but it's
an essential step.
Step 4 : Evaluate your answer : Look at your results
and ask whether they make sense. When the result is
a symbolic expression or formula, try to think of
special cases (particular values or extreme cases for
the various quantities) for which you can guess what
the results ought to be. Check to see that your
formula works in these particular cases.
Newton's Second Law : Dynamics of Particles
Step 1: Identify the relevant concepts : You have to
use Newton's second law for any problem that
involves forces acting on an accelerating body.
As with any problem, identify the target variable
usually an acceleration or a force. If the target
variable is something else, you'll need to identify
another concept to use. For example, suppose the
problem asks you to find how fast a sled is moving
when it reaches the bottom of a hill. This means your
target variable is the sled's final velocity. To find this,
you'll first need to use Newton's second law to find
the sled's acceleration. Then you'll also have to use
the constant acceleration relationships to find
velocity from acceleration.
Step 2: Set up the problem using the following steps:
Draw a simple sketch of the situation. Identify
one or more moving bodies to which you'll apply
Newton's second law.
For each body you identified, draw a free-body
diagram that shows all the forces acting on the
body. (Don't try to be fancyjust represent the
object by a point.) Be careful not to include any
forces exerted by the object on some other object.
Remember, the acceleration of a body is
determined by the forces that act on it, not by the
forces that it exerts on anything else. Make sure
you can answer the question "What other body is
applying this force ?" for each force in your
diagram. Furthermore, never include the quantity
a m
r
in your free-body diagram; it's not a force!
Label each force with an algebraic symbol for the
force's magnitude, as well as a numerical value of
the magnitude if it's given in the problem.
(Remember that magnitudes are always positive.
Minus signs show up later when you take
components of the forces.) Usually, one of the
forces will be the body's weight; it's usually best
to label this as w = mg. If a numerical value of
mass is given, you can compute the
corresponding weight.
Choose your x-and y-coordinate axes for each
object, and show them explicitly in each
free body diagram. Be sure to indicate which is
the positive direction for each axis. If you know
the direction of the acceleration, it usually
simplifies things to take one positive axis along
that direction. Note that if your problem involves
more than one object and the objects accelerate in
different directions, you can use a different set of
axes for each object.
In addition to Newton's second law,

F
r
= a m
r
,
identify any other equations you might need.
(You need one equation for each target variable.)
For example, you might need one or more of the
equations for motion with constant acceleration.
If more than one body is involved, there may be
relationships among their motions; for example,
they may be connected by a rope. Express any
such relationships as equations relating the
accelerations of the various bodies.
Step 3 : Execute the solution as follows :
For each object, determine the components of the
forces along each of the object's coordinate axes.
When you represent a force in terms of its
components, draw a wiggly line through the
original force vector to remind you not to include
it twice.
For each object, write a separate equation for each
component of Newton's second law, as in Eq.
F
x
= ma
x
; F
y
= ma
y
(Newton's second law,
component form)
Make a list of all the known and unknown
quantities. In your list, identify the target variable
or variables.
Check that you have as many equations as there
are unknowns. If you have too few equations, go
back to step 5 of "Set up the problem." If you
have too many equations, perhaps there is an
unknown quantity that you haven't identified as
such.
Do the easy part the math! Solve the equations
to find the target variable(s).
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 26 JUNE 2011
Step 4 : Evaluate your answer : Does your answer
have the correct units ? (When appropriate, use the
conversion 1N = 1kg . m/s
2
) Does it have the correct
algebraic sign ? (If the problem is about a sled sliding
downhill, you probably took the positive x-axis to
point down the hill. If you then find that the sled has
a negative acceleration that is, the acceleration is
uphill then something went wrong in your
calculations.) When possible, consider particular
values or extreme cases of quantities and compare the
results with your intuitive expectations. Ask, "Does
this result make sense ?"





1. A balloon is descending with a constant acceleration
a. The mass of the balloon and its contents is M.
What mass m of its contents should be released so
that the balloon starts ascending with the same
acceleration a ? Assume that the volume of the
balloon remains the same when the mass m is
released.
Sol. The forces acting on the balloon are its weight and
the upthrust U due to air. Since the volume of the
balloon remains the same the upthrust is the same in
both the cases. We have, According to Newton's
second law,
Mg U = Ma
and U (M m)g = (M m)a
Solving these, we get
m =
g a
a 2
+
M

U
Mg
a
U
(M m)g
a
(a) (b)


2. A frictionless cart of mass M carries two other
frictionless carts having masses m
1
and m
2
connected
by a string passing over a pulley, as shown in the
figure. What horizontal force F must be applied on M
so that m
1
and m
2
do not move relative to it ?
Sol. Since m
1
and m
2
are in accelerating frame, we can
assume that inertial force m
1
a and m
2
a act on them,
respectively, a being the acceleration of the system.
Clearly,
a =
2 1
m m M
F
+ +
...(1)
N
1
m
1
T
m
1
a
m
1
g
M
N
2
m
2
T
m
2
a
F
m
2
g

The forces acting on m
1
and m
2
are shown in fig. We
have
For m
1
: T = m
1
a
For m
2
: T = m
2
g
m
1
a = m
2
g
or a =
1
2
m
m
g ...(2)
Eqs. (1) & (2) give
F = (M + m
1
+ m
2
)
1
2
m
m
g

3. The total mass of an elevator with a 80 kg man in it is
1000 kg. This elevator moving upward with a speed
of 8 m/sec, is brought to rest over a distance of 16m.
Calculate (a) the tension T in the cables supporting
the elevator and (b) the force exerted on the man by
the elevator floor.
Sol. (a) The elevator having an initial upward speed of
8 m/sec is brought to rest within a distance of 16 m.
Hence,
0 = (8)
2
+ 2a(16) (Q v
2
= u
2
+ 2as)
a =
16 2
8 8

= 2 m/sec
2

Resultant upward force on elevator = T mg.
According to Newton's law,
T mg = ma
or T = mg + ma = m(g + a)
= 1000 (9.8 2) = 7800 N.
(b) Let P be the upward force exerted on the man by
the elevator floor. If m be the mass of the man, then
Weight of the man acting downward = mg
Upward force on the man = P mg.
According to Newton's law,
P mg = ma
or P = m(a + g)
or = 80 ( 2 + 9.8) = 624 N

4. What is the least horizontal force needed to pull a
cylinder of radius a and weight W over an obstacle of
height b ?
Sol. The situation is shown in fig. The different forces
acting on the cylinder are shown in fig. The weight
W of the cylinder acts downwards. The applied force
F is horizontal towards the left.
Solved Examples
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 27 JUNE 2011
b
F
W
(a)
O a
F
O
A
b
B
(a b)
W
(b)

As the cylinder is pulled up and not rolled up, the
algebraic sum of the moments about a point A, which
is in contact with the obstacle must be zero, hence
F OB = W AB
From fig. (b) , OB = (a b) and
AB = ] ) OB ( ) OA [(
2 2
= ] ) b a ( a [
2 2

= ) b ab 2 a a (
2 2 2
+ = )] b a 2 ( b [
F (a b) = W )] b a 2 ( b [
or F =
) b a (
)] b a 2 ( b [ W




5. Two particles of equals masses m and m are
connected by a light string of length 2l as shown in
fig. A constant force F is applied continuously at the
mid-point of the string, always along the
perpendicular bisector of the straight line joining the
two particles. Show that when the distance between
the two particles is x, the acceleration of the particle
is a =
m
F
.
2 / 1 2 2
) x (
x
l


m m
F
(a)
2l


T cos T cos
A B
F
(b)
T
l
2 2
x l

x
T

Sol. The force acting on A towards B is given by T cos .
From figure,
F = 2 T sin
or T =
sin 2
F
...(1)
Now, acceleration of A towards B,
a
1
= T cos /m ...(2)
and acceleration of B towards A,
a
2
= T cos /m ...(3)
Substituting the value of T, from eq. (1) in eqs. (2)
and (3), we get
a
1
= a
2
=

sin m 2
cos F
=
m 2
cot F


















































1. The storm cock or male mistlethrush sings as a
thunderstorm approaches.

2. A typical double mattress contains as many as
two million house dust mites.

3. The average human will grow 590 miles
(949.5 km) of hair in their lifetime.

4. About 51% of incoming solar radiation is
absorbed by the earth's surface and 14%
absorbed by the atmosphere.

5. Only 2% of male red deer are seriously injured
in their antler-rattling contests.

6. The United States recycles 25 percent of its
annual 180 million tons of household rubbish.

7. The largest sapphire weighed 2,302 carats. It
was found in Australia circa 1935, and was
carved into the shape of the head of President
Abraham Lincoln.

8. When the pharaohs' tombs were opened in
Egypt early in the nineteenth century, not only
human mummies were found but also those of
sacred animals such as cats and ibises

9. Flies are one of the major success's of the
insect world, and the 120 000+ species are
divided into three sub-orders, the Nematocera,
the Brachycera, and the Cyclorrhapha, and
these in turn are divided into about 100
families.

10. The angle between Earth's equatorial and
orbital planes varies by a few degrees every
40,000 years.

11. The San Francisco earthquake and fire of 18th
April 1906 caused the deaths of around 700
people, obliterated 500 city blocks and caused
$500 million of damage.

12. The slogan on New Hampshire licence plates
is 'Live Free or Die'. These licence plates are
manufactured by prisoners in the state prison
in Concord.

13. Venus is the hottest planet with a temperature
of 480 C.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 28 JUNE 2011
Organic
Chemistry
Fundamentals

















Alicyclic compounds :
In addition to the simple monocyclic compounds,
there are more complicated compounds with bridges
linked across the ring e.g.,

CH
CH
2
CH

CH
2
CH
2
H
2
C
H
2
C
bicyclo[2,2,1] heptatne

CH
2
CHCH
2
CHCH
2
CH
2
bicyclo[3,1,0] hexane

According to the I.U.P.A.C system, cycloalkanes
consisting of two rings only and having two or more
atoms in common, take the prefix bicyclo followed
by the name of the alkane containing the same total
number of carbon atoms. The number of carbon
atoms in each of the three bridges connecting the two
tertiary carbon atoms is indicated in brackets in
descending order. Numbering begins with one of the
bridgeheads and proceeds by the longest possible
path to the second bridgehead; numbering is then
continued from this atom by the longer unnumbered
path back to the first bridgehead and is completed by
the shortest path e.g.,

CH
3
6-chloro-2-ethyl-1, 8-dimethylbicyclo[3,2,1]octane
CH
2
CCHC
2
H
5
CHClCHCH
2
CHCH
3
CH
2
1

2 7
8
5

6 4

3

N.B.A bridged system is considered to have a
number of rings equal to the number of scissions
required to convert the system into an acyclic
compound.
Enantiomers and chiral molecules :
Enantiomers occur only with compounds whose
molecules are chiral. A chiral molecule is defined as
one that is not superposable on its mirror image.
Alkene stereoisomers are not chiral, whereas the
trans-1, 2-dimethylcyclopentane isomers are chiral. A
chiral molecule and its mirror image are called a pair
of enantiomers. The relationship between them is
defined as enantiomeric. Molecules (and objects)
that are superposable on their image are achiral
(meaning not chiral). Most socks, for example, are
achiral, whereas shoes are chiral. Many familiar
objects are chiral, while other objects can be shown
to be chiral only by applying the universal test for
chiralitythe nonsuperposability of the object and its
mirror image.


CH
3
C CH
2
CH
3
H
OH
(hydrogen)
(hydroxy)
(ethyl) (methyl)
1 2 3 4

An important property of enantiomers such as these
is that interchanging any two groups at the tetrahedral
atom that bears four different groups converts one
enantiomer into the other. In the figure, it is easy to
see that interchanging the OH group and H-atom
convert one enantiomer into the other.
Because interchanging two groups at C2 converts one
stereoisomer into another, C2

is an example of what
is called a stereogenic carbon. A stereogenic carbon
is defined as a carbon atom bearing groups of such
nature that an interchange of any two groups will
produce a stereoisomer. Carbon-2 of butanol is an
example of a tetrahedral stereogenic carbon. Not all
stereogenic cabons are tetrahedral, however. The
carbon atoms of cis- and trans-1, 2-dichloroethene
are examples of trigonal planar stereogenic carbons
because an interchange of groups at either atom also
produces a stereoisomer (a diastereomer). In general,
any location where an interchange of groups leads to
a stereoisomer is called a stereogenic centre.
When we discuss interchanging groups like this, we
must take care to notice that what we are describing
is something we do to a molecular model or
something we do on paper. An interchange of groups
in a real molecule, if it can be done, requires breaking
covalent bonds, and this is something that requires a
large input of energy. This means that enantiomers
such as the 2-butanol enantiomers do not interconvert
spontaneously.
Tests for chirality : Plane of symmetry
The ultimate way to test for molecular chirality is to
construct models of the molecule and its mirror
image and then determine whether they are
superposable. If the two models are superposable, the
molecule that they represent is achiral. If the models
are not superposable, then the molecules that they

NOMENCLATURE &
ISOMERISM
KEY CONCEPT
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 29 JUNE 2011
represent are chiral. We can apply this test with
actual models, as we have just described, or we can
apply it by drawing three-dimensional structures and
attempting to superpose them in our minds.
There are other aids, however, that will assist us in a
recognizing chiral molecules. We have mentioned
one already : the presence of a single tetrahedral
stereogenic carbon. The other aids are based on the
absence in the molecule of certain symmetry
elements. A molecule will not be chiral, for example,
if it possesses a plane of symmetry.
A plane of symmetry (also called a mirror plane) is
defined as an imaginary plane that bisects a molecule
in such a way that the two halves of the molecule are
mirror images of each other. The plane may pass
through atoms, between atoms, or both. For example,
2-chloropropane has a plane of symmetry fig.(a),
whereas 2-chlorobutane does not fig(b). All
molecules with a plane of symmetry are achiral.


H
Cl
C2H5
CH3
CH3
H
Cl
CH3
(a) (b)

(a) 2-Chloropropane has plane of symmetry & achiral.
(b) 2-Chlorobutane does not possess a plane of
symmetry and is chiral.
Specific Rotation :
The number of degrees that the plane of polarization
is rotated as the light passes through a solution of an
enantiomer depends on the number of chiral
molecules that it encounters. This, of course, depends
on the length of the tube and the concentration of the
enantiomer. In order to place measured rotations on a
standard basis, chemists calculate a quantity called
the specific rotation, [], by the following equation:
[] =
l . c


where [] = the specific rotation
= the observed rotation
c = the concentration of the solution in grams
per milliliter of solution (or density in g
mL
1
for neat liquids)
l = the length of the tube in decimeters
(1 dm = 10 cm)
The specific rotation also depends on the temperature
and the wavelength of light that is employed. Specific
rotations are reported so as to incorporate these
quantities as well. A specific rotation might be given
as follows :

25
D
] [ = + 3.12
This means that the D line of a sodium lamp ( =
589.6nm) was used for the light, that a temperature of
25C was maintained, and that a sample containing
1.00 g mL
1
of the optically active substance, in a
1-dm tube, produced a rotation of 3.12 in a
clockwise direction.The specific rotations of (R)-2-
butanol and (S)-2-butanol are given here :

CH
3
C
CH
2
CH
3
(R)-2-Butanol
[]
10
25
= 13.52
H HO
CH
3
C
CH
2
CH
3
(S)-2-Butanol
[]
10
25
= +13.52
OH H

The direction of rotation of plane-polarized light is
often incorporated into the names of optically active
compounds. The following two sets of enantiomers
show how this is done :

CH
3
C
C
2
H
5
(R)-(+)-2-Methyl-1-Butanol
[]
10
25
= +5.756
H HOCH
2
CH
3
C
C
2
H
5
(S)-()-2-Methyl-1-Butanol
[]
10
25
= 5.756
CH
2
OH H
CH
3
C
C
2
H
5
(R)-()-1-Chloro-2-methylbutane
[]
10
25
= 1.64
H ClCH
2
CH
3
C
C
2
H
5
(S)-(+)-1-Chloro-2-methylbutane
[]
10
25
= +1.64
CH
2
Cl H
The previous compounds also illustrate an important
principle : No obvious correlation exists between the
configurations of enantiomers and the direction [(+)
or ()] in which they rotate plane-polarized light.
(R)-(+)-2-Methyl-1-butanol and (R)-()-2-Methyl-1-
butanol chloro-2-methyl butane have the same
configuration; that is, they have the same general
arrangement of their atoms in space. They have,
however, an opposite effect on the direction of
rotation of the plane of plane-polarized light :

CH
3
C
C
2
H
5
(R)-(+)-2-Methyl-1-butanol
H HOCH
2
CH
3
C
C
2
H
5
(R)-()-1-Chloro-2-methylbutane
H ClCH
2

These same compounds also illustrate a second
important principle: No necessary correlation exist
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 30 JUNE 2011
between the (R) and (S) designation and the direction
of rotation of plane-polarized light. (R)-2-Methyl-1-
butanol is dextrorotatory (+), and (R)-1-chloro-2-
methyl butane is levorotatory ()
Racemic Forms
A sample that consists exclusively or predominantly
of one enantiomer causes a net rotation of plane
polarized light. A plane of polarized light as it
encounters a molecule of (R)-2-butanol, causing the
plane of polarization to rotate slightly in one
direction. (for the remaining purposes of our
discussion we shall limit our description of polarized
light to the resultant plane, neglecting consideration
of the circularly polarized components from which
plane-polarized light arises.) Each additional
molecule of (R)-2-butanol that the beam encounters
would cause further rotation in the same direction. If,
on the other hand, the mixture contained molecules of
(S)-2-butanol, each molecule of this enantiomer
would cause the plane of polarization to rotate in the
opposite direction. If the (R) and (S) enantiomers
were present in equal amounts, there would be no net
rotation of the plane of polarized light.
An equimolar mixtrure of two enantiomers such as
the example above is called a racemic mixture (or
racemate or racemic form). A racemic mixture causes
no net rotation of plane-polarized light. In a racemic
mixture the effect of each molecule of one
enantiomer on the in circularly polarized beam
cancels the effect of molecules of the other
enantiomers, resulting in no net optical activity.
The racemic form of a sample is often designated as
being ().A racemic mixture of (R)-()-2-butanol and
(S)-(+)-2-butanol might be indicated as
()-2-butanol or as ()- CH
3
CH
2
CHOHCH
3

Racemic forms and enantiomeric excess :
A sample of an optically active substance that
consists of a single enantiomer is said to be
enantiomerically pure or to have an enantiomeric
excess of 100%. An enantiomerically pure sample of
(S)-(+)-2-butanol shows a specific rotation of +13.52
(
25
D
] [ = + 13.52). On the other hand, a sample of
(S)-(+)-2-butanol that contains less than an equimolar
amount of (R)-()-2-butanol that contains less than an
equimolar amount of (R)-()-2-butanol will show a
specific rotation that is less than + 13.52 but greater
than 0. Such a sample is said to have an
enantiomeric excess less than 100%. The
enantiomeric excess (ee) is defined as follows :
% Enantiomeric excess
=
s enantiomer both of moles total
enantiomer other of moles - enantiomer one of moles
100
The enantiomeric excess can be calculated from
optical rotations :
% Enantiomeric excess
=
enantiomer pure the of rotation specific
rotation specific observed
100
Meso Compounds :
A structure with two stereogenic carbons does not
always have four possible stereoisomers. Sometimes
there are only three. This happens because some
molecules are achiral even though they contain
stereogenic carbons.
To understand this, let us write stereochemical
formulas for 2,3-dibromobutane shown here:
CH
3
CHBr
2,3-Dibromobutane
CHBr
CH
3
*
*

We begin in the same way as we did before. We
write the formula for one stereoisomer and for its
mirror image:

CH
3
C
(A)
H Br
C
CH
3
Br H
CH
3
C
(B)
Br H
C
CH
3
H Br

Structures A and B are nonsuperposable and
represent a pair of enantiomers.
When we write structure C and its mirror image D,
however, the situation is different. The two structures
are superposable. This means that C and D do not
represent a pair of enantiomers. Formulas C and D
represent two different orientations of the same
compounds :
CH
3
C
(C)
Br H
C
CH
3
Br H
CH
3
C
(D)
H Br
C
CH
3
H Br
This structure
when turned by
180 in the plane
of the page can
be superposed
on C.

The molecule represented by structure C (or D) is not
chiral even though it contains tetrahedral atoms with
four different attached groups. Such molecules are
called meso compounds. Meso compounds, because
they are achiral, are optically inactive.



XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 31 JUNE 2011
Physical
Chemistry
Fundamentals
















Equivalent and Molar conductivities :
Since the charges of solute ions are critical in
determining the conductance of a solution, the
comparison of conductance data is made between
values for solutions corresponding to a total of unit
charge on each ion of the solute. It is because of this
that the equivalent conductivity of the solution is
employed for comparison purpose.
Suppose 1 equivalent mass of an electrolyte is
dissolved in volume V of the solution. Let this whole
solution be placed in a conductivity cell. Multiplying
and dividing the right side of Eq. (i) by the distance l
between the two electrodes of the cell, we get eq. (ii)
= |
.
|

\
|
A
l
G = |
.
|

\
|
A
l
R
1
; ...(i) G =
2
A
l
l
=
2
V
l


or Gl
2
= V ...(ii)
Note : Both V and l
2
in Eq. (ii) carry the units of m
3

eq
1
and m
2
eq
1
, respectively.
The term Gl
2
is known as equivalent conductivity,
abbreviated as
eq
. Thus, we have ,
eq
= Gl
2
= V
The equivalent conductivity of an electrolyte may be
defined as the conductance of a volume of solution
containing one equivalent mass of a dissolved
substance when placed between two parallel
electrodes which are at a unit distance apart, and
large enough to contain between them the whole
solution. The equivalent conductivity thus gives the
conducting power of the ions produced by 1
equivalent mass (i.e., mass corresponding to a total of
unit charge on each ion) of an electrolyte at any
particular concentration.
The unit of
eq
in CGS units are :

eq
= (
1
cm
1
) (cm
3
eq
1
) =
1
cm
2
eq
1
S cm
2
eq
1


If c is the concentration of the solution (in equivalent
per unit volume), then V (which carry a unit of m
3

eq
1
) will be equal to 1/c. Hence, Eq. (ii) may be
written as

eq
= (1/c) i.e.
eq
= /c ...(iii)
In SI units, c is expressed as the amount per unit
volume instead of equivalent per unit volume, and
thus one uses the term molar conductivity as defined
below. The molar conductivity,
m
, of an electrolyte
may be defined as the conductance of a volume of
solution containing one mole of a dissolved substance
when placed between two parallel electrodes which
are at a unit distance apart, and large enough to
contain between them the whole solution. Thus, it
gives the conducting power of the ions produced by 1
mole of an electrolyte at any particular concentration.
This can be calculated using the expressions
analogous to eqs (ii) and (iii).

m
= V

= (1/c) i.e.
m
= /c
where V is the volume of the solution containing one
mole of the substance and c is the resultant molar
concentration. Note V carries the unit of m
3
mol
1

The unit of
m
will be

m
= (
1
m
1
)(m
3
mol
1
) =
1
m
2
mol
1
Sm
2
mol
1

Variation of conductivity and molar conductivity with
concentration :
Both the conductivity and molar conductivity of a
solution vary with concentration. The conductivity
increases with increase in concentration whereas the
molar conductivity increases on dilution (i.e.
decrease in concentration). For strong electrolytes,
conductivity increases sharply with increase in
concentration while for weak electrolytes it starts at
lower value in dilute solutions and increases much
more gradually. In both the cases, this increase is due
to the increase in the number of ions per unit volume
of the solution. For strong electrolytes, the number of
ions per unit volume increases in proportion to the
concentration and that is why the increase in
conductivity is very rapid. In weak electrolytes,
however, the increase in the number of ions is
basically due to the change in the partial ionization of
the solute, and consequently, the conductivity
increases very gradually.
As stated above, molar conductivity
m
of both
strong and weak electrolytes increases on dilution.
The basic reason for this is that the decreases in
conductivity is more than compensated by increase in
the value of 1/c on dilution.
The variation of molar conductivity on dilution for
strong and weak electrolytes shows altogether
different behavior as can be seen from figure where

m
has been plotted against c . For strong
electrolytes, the variation is almost linear in dilute
solutions while that for weak electrolytes, the
variation is very rapid. As the molar conductivity is a
measure of the conducting power of all the ions that
are available in 1 mole of the substance, it is,
therefore, obvious that the number of ions that are
available for conductance increases on dilution. For
weak electrolytes, the increase in the number of ions
has been explained on the basis of Arrhenius theory

ELECTRO
CHEMISTRY
KEY CONCEPT
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 32 JUNE 2011
of electrolytic dissociation whereas that for strong
electrolytes has been explained on the basis of
Debye-Huckel-Onsager theory. In brief, the increase
in the number of ions in case of weak electrolytes is
due to the increase in the degree of ionization of the
electrolyte on dilution, whereas in the case of strong
electrolytes, this increase is due to the weakening of
the ion-ion interactions on dilution. A brief account
of the above two theories is given in the following.

(i
(ii


Variation of molar conductivity on dilution (i) for
strong electrolyte and (ii) weak electrolyte
Kohlrausch's law of independent migration of ions:
For a strong electrolyte, the value of
m
in a very
dilute solution, is very close to the limiting value of
the conductivity

m
at infinite dilution (or at zero
concentration obtained by extrapolation). On the
other hand, the corresponding value for a weak
electrolyte is very far away from the limiting value at
zero concentration. For example, at 25 C for 0.001
M sodium chloride solution
m
is 123.7 ohm
1
cm
2

mol
1
as against

m
of 126.5 ohm
1
cm
2
mol
1
. At
the same concentration and temperature, the value for
acetic acid is 49.2 ohm
1
cm
2
mol
1
as compared to
390.7 ohm
1
cm
2
mol
1
for the value of

m
.
Kohlrausch was the first to point out that when
m

for a uni-univalent strong electrolyte is plotted
against c , the curve approaches linearity in dilute
solutions, i.e.
m
=

m
b c ...(i)
where b is constant. The value of

m
can, thus, be
obtained by extrapolating the above curve to a value
of c = 0.
Statement of Kohlrausch's Law : The extrapolation
method cannot be employed for a weak electrolyte as

m
versus c curve does not approach linearity in
solutions as dilute as 0.0001 M. In fact, the variation
of
m
with dilution is very rapid. However, the value
of

m
for a weak electrolyte can be determined by
the application of Kohlrauschs law of independent
migration of ions. This law states that at infinite
dilution, where dissociation for all electrolytes is
complete (including weak electrolytes since 1 as
c 0; Ostwald dilution law) and where all interionic
effects disappear (because of larger distance between
ions), each ion migrates independently of its co-ion
and contributes to the total molar conductivity of an
electrolyte a definite share which depends only on its
own nature and not at all on the ion with which it is
associated. Thus,

m
of the electrolyte must be
equal to the sum of the molar conductivities of the
ions composing it. Thus

m
(AB) =

(A
+
) +

(B

) ...(ii)
Abnormally high conductivities of H
+
and OH
-

The molar conductivities of the hydrogen ion and the
hydroxyl ion are much larger than those of other ions.
This was first explained by von Grotthus and hence is
known as Grotthus conductance. It is explained on
the basis of a proton jump from one water molecule
to another. The process of proton transfer results in a
more rapid transfer of positive charge from one
region of the solution to another, than would be
possible if the ion H
3
O
+
has to push its way through
the solution as other ions do. The mechanisms of
conduction of H
+
ion and OH

ion are shown below.


H O
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O H
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O H
H
O H
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
H O
H
H O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
H O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
+
+
+
+
+
+


O
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O
H +
O H
H
O
H
H O
H
H O
H
H O
H
O H
H
O H
H
O
H
H O
H
H O
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O
H
H O
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O H
H
O
H


This type of mechanism also prevails in any other
solvent. Thus, in a given solvent (for example, liquor
ammonia) the molar conductivities of its
characteristic cation and anion (namely, NH
4
+
and
NH
2

) will have unusually high values than any other


cations and anions.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 33 JUNE 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 34 JUNE 2011








1. The action of concentrated sulphuric acid on urea
(NH
2
CONH
2
) results in the production of a white
crystalline solid X of formula H
3
NO
3
S. This is a
monobasic acid. On treatment with sodium nitrate
and dilute hydrochloride acid at 0C it liberates 1 mol
of N
2
per mol of X, and on addition of aqueous
barium chloride the resulting solution yields 1 mol of
BaSO
4
per mol of X taken. Deduce the structure of X.
Sol. NH
2
CONH
2
(Urea) reacts with conc H
2
SO
4
forming
X(H
3
NO
3
S). X contains one ionisation H (since, X is
a monobasic acid). Thus,

NH
2
C NH
2
+ H O S O H
Urea
O
Sulphuric acid
O


X
3 2
H SO NH + NH
3
+ CO
X contains free NH
2
as well as free SO
3
H.
(NaNO
2
+ HCl) converts free NH
2
into free OH
group liberating N
2
.
NaNO
2
+ HCl HNO
2
+ NaCl
NH
2
SO
3
H + HNO
2
N
2
+ H
2
O + H
2
SO
4

1 mol X 1 mol X 1 mol
H
2
SO
4
+ BaCl
2
BaSO
4
+ 2HCl
1 mol 1 mol
Thus X is NH
2
SO
3
H (amino sulphonic acid), 1 mol
of which liberated 1 mol of N
2
on reaction with
(NaNO
2
+ HCl) at 0C and in turn resulting solution
gives 1 mol of BaSO
4
on reaction with BaCl
2


2. Calculate mol of Ca(OH)
2
required to carry out
following conversion taking one mol in each case :
(a)
COOH
COOH
into
COO
COO
Ca
(b) H
3
PO
4
into CaHPO
4

(c) NH
4
Cl into NH
3

(d) NaHCO
3
into CaCO
3
Sol. (a)
COOH
COOH
is a dibasic acid

COOH
COOH
+ Ca(OH)
2
COO
COO
Ca
1 mol 1 mol

Ca(OH)
2
required = 1 mol

(b) H
3
PO
4
+ Ca(OH)
2
CaHPO
4
+ 2H
2
O
1 mol of H
3
PO
4
2H
+
neutralised by 1 mol of
Ca(OH)
2

Ca(OH)
2
required = 1 mol
(c) 2NH
4
Cl + Ca(OH)
2
CaCl
2
+ 2NH
3
+ 2H
2
O
2 mol NH
4
Cl 1 mol Ca(OH)
2

1 mol NH
4
Cl 0.5 mol Ca(OH)
2

(d) 2NaHCO
3
+ Ca(OH)
2
Na
2
CO
3
+ CaCO
3
+
2H
2
O
2 mol NaHCO
3
1 mol Ca(OH)
2

1 mol NaHCO
3
0.5 mol Ca(OH)
2

3. A compound Co(en)
2
(NO
2
)
2
Cl has been prepared in
a number of isomeric forms. One form undergoes no
reaction with AgNO
3
or (en) and is optically inactive.
A second form reacts with AgNO
3
but not with (en)
and is optically inactive. A third form is optically
active and reacts with both AgNO
3
and (en). Identify
each of these isomeric forms. Name and sketch each
of the structures.
Sol. Based on reactions with AgNO
3
and (en), and optical
activity, isomers can be identified.
First form : There is no reaction with AgNO
3
, hence
no Cl

ions outside coordination sphere. Also there is


no reaction with bidentate (en), hence these ligands
are trans to each other. Optical inactivity is also due
to trans structure. Thus, it may have structure :

Co en
en
Cl
NO
2
NO
2

+

trans-chloronitrobis (ethylenediamine) cobalt (III)
nitrite.
Secon form : In this Cl

is outside coordination
sphere since it reacts with AgNO
3
. As in the first
form NO
2

ligands are trans to each other being


optically inactive. This is represented as,

Co en
en
NO
2
NO
2
Cl

+

trans-bis (ethylenediamine) dinitrocobalt (III) chloride
UNDERSTANDING
Inorganic Chemistry
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 35 JUNE 2011
Third form : In this case also, Cl

is outside
coordination sphere. Also it shows reaction with (en)
hence monodentate ligands are cis to each other.
Being optically active, mirror image should not
superimpose. Thus, it can have structure :
Co
en
NO
2
Cl

+
en
NO
2

cis-bis (ethylenediamine) dinitrocobalt (III) chloride

4. An inorganic halide (A) gives the following
reactions.
(i) The cation of (A) on raction with H
2
S in HCl
medium, gives a black ppt. of (B). (A) neither
gives ppt. with HCl nor blue colour with
K
4
Fe(CN)
6
.
(ii) (B) on heating with dil.HCl gives back
compound(A) and a gas (C) which gives a black
ppt. with lead acetate solution.
(iii) The anion of (A) gives chromyl chloride test.
(iv) (B) dissolves in hot dil. HNO
3
to give a solution,
(D). (D) gives ring test.
(v) When NH
4
OH solution is added to (D), a white
precipitate (E) is formed. (E) dissolves in
minimum amount of dil. HCl to give a solution of
(A). Aqueous solution of (A) on addition of water
gives a whitish turbidity (F).
(vi) Aqueous solution of (A) on warming with
alkaline sodium stannite gives a black precipitate
of a metal (G) and sodium stannate. The metal
(G) dissolves in hydrochloride acid to give
solution of (A).
Identify (A) to (G) and give balanced chemical
equations of reactions.
Sol. Observation of (i) indicates that cation (A) is Bi
3+

because it does not give ppt. with HCl nor blue
colour with K
4
Fe(CN)
6
, hence it is neither Pb
2+
nor
Cu
2+
. Since anion of (A) gives chromyl chloride test,
hence it contains Cl

ions. Thus, (A) is BiCl


3
. Its
different reactions are given below :
(i) 2BiCl
3
+ 3H
2
S Bi
2
S
3
+ 6HCl
(A) (B)
(ii) Bi
2
S
3
+ 6HCl 3H
2
S + 2 BiCl
3

(B) (C) (A)
(iii) Bi
2
S
3
+ 8HNO
3

2Bi(NO
3
)
3
+ 2NO
(B) (D) + 3S + 4H
2
O
(iv) Bi(N O
3
)
3
+ 3NH
4
OH
(D) Bi(OH)
3
+ 3NH
4
NO
3

(E) White ppt.
Bi(OH)
3
+ 3HCl

BiCl
3
+ 3H
2
O
Dil. (A)
BiCl
3
+ H
2
O BiOCl + 2HCl
(A) (F)
Bismuth oxychloride
(White turbidity)
(v) BiCl
3
+ 2NaOH +Na
2
[SnO
2
]
(A)
Bi + NaSnO
3
+ H
2
O + 3NaCl

(G) Black ppt.
2Bi + 6HCl

2BiCl
3
+ 3H
2

(G) (A)
Hence,
(A) is BiCl
3
,
(B) is Bi
2
S
3
,
(C) is H
2
S,
(D) is Bi(NO
3
)
2
,
(E) is Bi(OH)
3
, (F) is BiOCl and (G) is Bi

5. Compound (X) on reduction with LiAlH
4
gives a
hydride (Y) containing 21.72% hydrogen along with
other products. The compound (Y) reacts with air
explosively resulting in boron trioxide. Identify (X)
and (Y). Give balanced reactions involved in the
formation of (Y) and its reaction with air. Draw the
structure of (Y).
Sol. Since B
2
O
3
is formed by reaction of (Y) with air, (Y)
therefore should be B
2
H
6
in which % of hydrogen is
21.72. The compound (X) on reduction with LiAlH
4

gives B
2
H
6
. Thus it is boron trihalide. The reactions
are shown as:

) X (
3
BX 4 + 3LiAlH
4

) Y (
6 2
H B 2 + 3LiX + 3AlX
3

(X = Cl or Br)

) Y (
6 2
H B + 3O
2
B
2
O
3
+ 3H
2
O + heat
Structure of B
2
H
6
is as follows:

B
H
t
B
H
t
H
t
H
t
H
b
H
b
or


B
H
t
H
t
H
b
H
b
B
H
t
H
t
121.5
1.33
97
1.19
1.77

Thus, the diborane molecule has four two-centre-two
electron bonds (2c-2e

bonds) also called usual bonds


and two three-centre-two-electron bonds (3c-2e


bonds) also called banana bonds. Hydrogen attached
to usual and banana bonds are called H
t
(terminal H)
and H
b
(bridged H) respectively.



XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 36 JUNE 2011






















1. Six different boxes are placed in a row. A ball is to be
put in each box. If unlimited balls of red, blue, green
and white colour are available, then find the number
of ways in which all the boxes can be filled so that no
two adjacent boxes have balls of the same colour in
them.

2. If the non singular matrix A is symmetric, then
justify that A
1
is also symmetric.

3. If
1
,
2
,
3
and
4
are eccentric angles of four
conormal points on the hyperbola
2
2
a
x

2
2
b
y
= 1, the
normals at which are concurrent, then prove that
cos(
1
+
2
) = 0.

4. Show that the origin lies in the acute angle between
the planes x + 2y + 2z = 9 and 4x 3y + 12z + 13 = 0.

5. Let f (x) be a differentiable function on the interval
a x b, with a > 0 and suppose that f (x) has a
differentiable inverse, f
1
(x). Evaluate :

) (
) (
2 2 1
) )) ( ((
)) ( ) ( (
b f
a f
b
a
dy a y f
dx x f b f x


6. If x +
x
1
= 2 5 + and y +
y
1
= 2, then
x
16
+
16
1
x
+ y
20
+
20
1
y
is
(A) 49 (B) 51

(C) 2209 (D) 102


7. A circle S
1
of area 36 cm
2
touches the coordinate
axes. Another circle S
2
smaller than S
1
also touches
the coordinate axes as well as S
1
also, then the radius
of S
2
is
(A) 2cm (B) 2 cm
(C) 12 6 2 cm (D) 18 12 2 cm

8. Find the sum of all the natural number 1 to 120 which
are divisible neither by 2 nor 7.
(A) 3042 (B) 3084
(C) 2529 (D) 3033

Passage :

Given below are the definitions of functions
F(x), f (x), g(x) and h(x)
F(x) = x
3
; 0 x 1
= x
3
; 1 x < 0
= 1 ; otherwise
f (x) = F(x); x R
g(x) = F(x); x R
h(x) = F(x) ; x R
Answer the following questions based on these
informations.

9. How many of the following expressions are
necessarily zero for every real value of x :
f (x) + h(x); g(x) h(x); F(x) + f (x);
f (x) g(x) ?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

10. Which of the following relations is necessarily true ?
(A) h(x) = f (x); x R
(B) F(x) = f (x); x R
(C) g(x) + f (x) = 0, x R
(D) h(x) F(x) = 0; x R

`t{xt|vt V{txzx
This section is designed to give IIT JEE aspirants a thorough grinding & exposure to variety
of possible twists and turns of problems in mathematics that would be very helpful in facing
IIT JEE. Each and every problem is well thought of in order to strengthen the concepts and
we hope that this section would prove a rich resource for practicing challenging problems and
enhancing the preparation level of IIT JEE aspirants.
By : Shailendra Maheshwari
Joint Director Academics, Career Point, Kota Sol ut i ons wi l l be publ i shed i n next i ssue
2
Set
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 37 JUNE 2011











1. [A] Let Y draws any card, the probability that X
draws the same card = 1/n

2. [B] Let X draws a card marked with r, then y can
draw any card marked 1, 2, 3, .... r 1. Hence the
required probability =

n
r
n
r
n
1
) 1 ( 1
=
n
n
2
1


3. [B] Let Y draws r
th
card, then X draws any card
marked 1, 2, 3 ...... (r 1),
Hence required probability =

=
|
.
|

\
|
n
r
n
r
n
1
1 1
=
n
n
2
1


4. I
m, n
=

1
0
x
m
(1 x)
n

dx, let x = sin
2

= 2

1
0
sin
2m + 1
. cos
2n
+ 1 d
=
2
1 1
+ +
+ +
n m
n m


49 , 24
50 , 25
I
I
=
75
50 25
77
51 . 26
=
49 24 76
74 . 50 25
=
75 76
50 25


228
50 , 25
51 26
,
I
I
= 50

5. d
2
= (x
1
x
2
)
2
+
2
2 2
2
1
) 13 ( ) 17 (
20
|
|
.
|

\
|
x x
x

it is the sq. of distance b/w two points
|
|
.
|

\
|
20
,
2
1
1
x
x &
( ) ) 13 )( 17 ( ,
2 2 2
x x x


(15, 0)

First point lies on y =
20
2
1
x

2
nd
point lies on y
2
+ x
2
30x + 221 = 0
centre (15, 0), r = 221 225 = 2
y =
20
2
x
x
2
= 20 y
normal is
x = my 10m 5m
3

it passes through (15, 0)
15 + 10m + 5m
3
= 0
m
3
+ 2m + 3 = 0
(m + 1) (m
2
m + 3) = 0
m = 1
so point on parabola (2am, am
2
) = (+10, 5)
Required minimum distance is
d =
2 2
) 5 ( ) 10 15 ( +
= 25 25 + = 2 5 2
so d
min
2
= ( 2 5 2)
2

= 50 + 4 2 20 = 54 2 20

6. as | f (x) | | tan x | for x |
.
|

\
|

2
,
2

so f (0) = 0
so | f (x) f (0) | | tan x |
divide both sides by | x |

x
f x f ) 0 ( ) (

x
x tan


0 x
Lt
x
f x f ) 0 ( ) (

0 x
Lt
x
x tan

| f (0) | 1.

n
a
n
a a a
1
....
3
1
2
1
3 2 1
+ + + + 1

=
n
i
i
i
a
1
1

7. ac b 4
2
|b|
2
4
1
b
ac
|b|
2
4
1
b
ac
+
|b|
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
2
2
1
b
ac


MATHEMATICAL CHALLENGES

SOLUTION FOR MAY ISSUE (SET # 1)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 38 JUNE 2011
so ac b 4
2
|b| +
b
ac 2

so that
a
ac b
a
b
2
4
2
2


a
b
2
+
a
b
2
+
b
c

=
a
b
+
b
c

Hence the solutions of az
2
+ bz + c = 0 satisfy the
condition
|z| +
a
b
+
b
c


8. f (x) = (x 1)
3
g(x) + 1
f (x) is divisible by (x 1)
2
& f (x) = (x + 1)
3
g(x) 1
f (x) is divisible by (x + 1)
2


so f (x) = a(x
2
1)
2
= a(x
4
2x
2
+ 1)
Now, f (x) =
5
5
ax

3
2
3
x
a + ax + c
f (+1) =
5
a

3
2a
+ a + c = 1
8a + 15 c = 15 ...(1)
& f (1) =
5
a
+
3
2a
a + c = 1
8a + 15 c = 15 ...(2)
so c = 0, so a =
8
15

so f (x) =
8
1
(3x
5
10x
3
+ 15x)

9. Let the centre be O and P.V. of the pt. are
respectively a , b , c , d

C
B
A
D
O

so | | a = | | b = | | c = | | d = R.
given AB
2
+ CD
2
= 4R
2

2
| | a b +
2
| | c d = 4R
2


2
| | b +
2
| | a b a. 2 +
2
| | d +
2
| | c d c. 2 = 4R
2

4R
2
b a. 2 d c. 2 = 4R
2


so b a. + d c. = 0 ...(1)
cos (AOB) + cos (COD) = 0
cos AOB = cos ( COD)
so (AOB) + COD =
so AOD + BOC =
cos(AOD) + cos(BOC) = 0
so d a. + b c. = 0 ...(2)
Now, BD . AC = ) ( . ) ( b d a c
= d c. b c. d a. + b a.
using (1) & (2) in it
BD AC. = 0
so AC BD

10. Let
2
2
a
x
+
2
2
b
y
= 1 be the ellipse and
y = m
1
(x ae) and y = m
2
(x ae) are two chords
through its focus (ae, 0). Any conic through the
extrimities of these chords can be defined as
{y m
1
(x ae)} {y m
2
(x ae)}
+
|
|
.
|

\
|
+ 1
2
2
2
2
b
y
a
x
= 0 ...(1)
If it passes through origin, then
m
1
m
2
a
2
e
2
= 0 ...(2)
solving (1) with x axis
m
1
m
2
(x ae)
2
+
|
|
.
|

\
|
1
2
2
a
x
= 0
using (2) in it
(x ae)
2
+ e
2
(x
2
a
2
) = 0
(1 + e
2
)x
2
2aex = 0
x = 0 & x =
2
1
2
e
ae
+

so other point on x-axis through which this conic
passes is |
.
|

\
|
+
0 ,
1
2
2
e
ae
which is a fixed point.
Hence proved.
















The Atomic clock sends out a signal to a time
code generator which produces the time code. This
is then amplified and sent to an antenna using a
transmission line. The antenna then radiates the
time signal through a network of wires connected
to several antenna towers where it is sent out.
By the time the average bucket of sand had been
processed and the silicon in it converted into
silicon chips fit for personal computers, an average
garden bucket of sand would be worth more than
4 million. Unfortunately it is not the cost of the
raw materials, but the laborious process involved
to convert it that costs the money.
On January 7th 1949 the announcement of the
first photograph of genes was given at the
University of Southern California by Dr. Daniel
Chapin Pease and Dr. Richard Freligh Baker.
Appliances like VCRs and microwaves draw 5
Watts of power or less when they arent on to
power their built-in clock.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 39 JUNE 2011











1. Let there be a quotient of two natural numbers in
which the denominator is one less than the square of
the numerator. If we add 2 to both numerator and
denominator, the quotient will exceed
3
1
. If we
subtract 3 from the numerator as well as the
denominator, the quotient will lie between 0 and
10
1
.
Determine the quotient.
Sol. Let the quotient be
q
p
where p N, q N.
According to the question,
q = p
2
1 ...(i)

2
2
+
+
q
p
>
3
1
...(ii)
0 <
3
3
q
p
<
10
1
...(iii)
From (i) and (ii),
2 1
2
2
+
+
p
p
>
3
1

or
1
2
2
+
+
p
p
>
3
1

or 3(p + 2) > p
2
+ 1 {Q p
2
+ 1 > 0}
or p
2
3p 5 < 0;
the corresponding equation is p
2
3p 5 = 0
p =
2
5 . 4 9 3 +
=
2
29 3

the sign-scheme for p
2
3p 5, p R is as
follows;

(+) () (+)
2
29 3

2
29 3+


p
2
3p 5 < 0
2
29 3
< <
2
29 3+

1.2 < p < 4.2
But p is a natural number. So possible values of
p = 1, 2, 3, 4.
(3) 0 <
3 1
3
2
p
p
<
10
1
or 0 <
4
3
2
p
p
<
10
1

When p = 1,
4
3
2
p
p
=
4 1
3 1
=
3
2
=
3
2
|
.
|

\
|
10
1
, 0 .
When p = 2,
4
3
2
p
p
=
4 4
3 2
|
.
|

\
|
10
1
, 0 .
When p = 3,
4
3
2
p
p
=
4 9
3 3
= 0 |
.
|

\
|
10
1
, 0 .
When p = 4,
4
3
2
p
p
=
4 16
3 4
=
12
1
|
.
|

\
|
10
1
, 0 .
the quotient =
q
p
=
1
2
p
p
=
1 4
4
2
=
15
4
.

2. A variable circle passes through the point of
intersection O of two given straight lines and cuts
off from them portions OP and OQ such that
m.OP + n. OQ = 1; prove that the circle always
passes through a fixed point other than O.
Sol. Let O be selected as the origin and the lines be y = 0
and y = x where P is on y = 0 and Q is on y = x.
Now, P = (OP, 0) and
Q = (OQcos , OQsin )
=
|
|
.
|

\
|
+

+
2 2
1
. ,
1
1
. OQ OQ (Q tan = )

Q

y = x
O
P y = 0

Let the equation of the circle be
x
2
+ y
2
+ 2gx + 2f y + c = 0 ...(i)
As it passes through O, P and Q we get
c = 0 ...(ii)
OP
2
+ 2g . OP = 0; OP = 2g ...(iii)
OQ
2
.
2
1
1
+
+ OQ
2
.
2
2
1 +


Experts Solution for Question asked by IIT-JEE Aspirants
Students' Forum
MATHS
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 40 JUNE 2011
+ 2g . OQ.
2
1
1
+
+ 2 f . OQ .
2
1 +

= 0
or OQ
2
+ OQ .
2
1
2 2
+
+ f g
= 0
OQ =
2
1
) ( 2
+
+ f g

But m . OP + n. OQ = 1
m(2g) + n .

+
+
2
1
) ( 2

f g
= 1
or
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
2
1
2
2
n
m g 2n .
2
1 +

f = 1
2n .
2
1 +

f = 1 + 2
|
|
.
|

\
|
+
+
2
1
n
m g
2f =

+
n
2
1

|
|
.
|

\
|
+
+ + g
n
m
2
1
2 1
= kg + p where k and p are constant.
from (i) and (ii), the circle has the equation
x
2
+ y
2
+ 2gx + (kg + p)y = 0
or x
2
+ y
2
+ py + g(2x + ky) = 0
which is of the form S + L = 0.
this circle passes through the intersection of the
circle x
2
+ y
2
+ py = 0 and the line 2x + ky = 0, both
being fixed.
But the line 2x + ky = 0 and the circle x
2
+ y
2
+ py = 0
cut at two fixed points, one of them being the origin O.
Hence, the circles pass through a fixed point other
than O.

3. A lamp-post, 4.5 m high, is 4.2 m away from a
straight footpath. A boy, 1.5 m tall, walks along the
path at the rate of 1.8 m/s. Find the rate at which his
shadow is shortening when he has 14.4 m more to
cover in order to arrive at the point on the path
nearest to the lamp-post.
Sol. The height of the lamp-post = AB = 4.5 m;
the height of the man = PQ = 1.5 m;
the distance of the lamp-post from the path
= BC = 4.2 m.
Let BQ = x m, BD = y m and QC = z m
the length of the shadow = QD = (y x) m.
A
B
P
Q
D
yx x
4.2 m
C
z
1.5 m
4.5 m

We have to find
dt
x y d ) (
when z = 14.4 m.
From the question,
dt
dz
= 1.8 m/s
Now, from BCQ, x
2
= z
2
+ (4.2)
2
...(i)
As ABD ~ PQD,
5 . 1
5 . 4
=
QD
BD
, i.e., 3 =
x y
y


or 3(y x) = y = (y x) + x 2 (y x) = x
or 2
dt
x y d ) (
=
dt
dx
...(ii)
Differentiating (i), 2x
dt
dx
= 2z
dt
dz
= 2z(1.8)

dt
dx
=
x
z 8 . 1
=
2 2
) 2 . 4 (
8 . 1
+ z
z
.
When z = 14.4 m,
dt
dx
=
2 2
) 2 . 4 ( ) 4 . 14 (
4 . 14 8 . 1
+

m/s
from (ii),
dx
x y d ) (
=
2
1
.
2 2
) 2 . 4 ( ) 4 . 14 (
4 . 14 8 . 1
+

m/s
=
2
1
.
15
4 . 14 8 . 1
m/s
= 0.06 14.4 m/s = 0.864 m/s.
his shadow is shortening at the rate of 0.864 m/s.

4. Integrate

+
+ +
1 3
2 2
} log 2 ) 1 {log( 1
n
n n
x
x n x x
dx, n R.
Sol. Here I =
1 2
2 2 2
log ) 1 log(
.
1
+
+ +
n
n n
n
n
x
x x
x
x
dx
=

+1
1
2n
x
.
+
|
.
|

\
|
+
1 2
2
1
1
log
n
n
x
x
dx.
Put
n
x
2
1
+ 1 = z
2
; then
1 2
2
+ n
x
n
dx = 2zdz
I =

2
log . z z .
n
zdz

zdz z
n
log
2
2

=
(
(

dz
z
z z
z
n
1
.
3

3
. log
2
3 3

=
(
(

3
.
3
1
log
3
1 2
3
3
z
z z
n
+ c
=
n
z
9
2
3
{3 log z 1} + c
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 41 JUNE 2011
=
2 / 3
2
1
1
9
2
|
.
|

\
|
+
n
x n
.

|
.
|

\
|
+ 1 1
1
log 3
2 / 1
2n
x
+ c
=

+ +
1
1
log
2
3 ) 1 (
9
2
2
2
3
2 / 3 2
n
n
n
n
x
x
x
x
n
+ c
=
n 9
2
.
n
n
x
x
3
2 / 3 2
) 1 ( +

c x n x
n
+
)
`

+ 1 log 3 ) 1 log(
2
3
2


5. A rigid body is rotating about an axis through the
point (3, 1, 2). If the particle at the point (4, 1, 0)
has the velocity

i 4

j 4 +

k 2 and that at the


point (3, 2, 1) has the velocity

i 6

j 4 +

k 4 , find
the magnitude and direction of the angular velocity of
the body.
Sol. Let the angular velocity be

.


P(4, 1, 0)
Q(3, 2, 1)
A(3, 1,2)



The velocity at a point is given by

v =

r
from the question,

i 4

j 4 +

k 2 =

AP
and

i 6

j 4 +

k 4 =

AQ.
But,

AP =

AO +

OP =

OP

OA
= (

i 4 +

j ) (

i 3

k 2 )
=

i +

j 2 +

k 2

AQ =

AO +

OQ =

OQ

OA
= (

i 3 +

j 2 +

k ) (3

i

k 2 )
=

j 3 +

k 3
we get,

i 4

j 4 +

k 2 =

(

i +

j 2 +

k 2 ) ...(i)

i 6

j 4 +

k 4 =

(3

j +

k 3 ) ...(ii)
Let

i x +

j y +

k z . Then from (i),


i 4

j 4 +

k 2 =
2 2 1
z y x
k j i


= (2y 2z)

i (2x z)

j + (2x y)

k
2y 2z = 4, 2x z = 4, 2x y = 2
y z = 2, 2x y = 2
(Q the second equation can be obtained from the
other two)
From (ii),

i 6 4

j +

k 4 =
3 3 0
z y x
k j i


= (3y 3z)

i 3x

j + 3x

k
3y 3z = 6, 3x = 4, 3x = 4
y z = 2, x =
3
4
.
Thus, we have the following three different equation
in x, y, z :
y z = 2, 2x y = 2, x =
3
4

Solving these x =
3
4
, y =
3
2
, z =
3
4

angular velocity

i
3
4
+

j
3
2

k
3
4

| |

w =
2 2 2
3
4
3
2
3
4
|
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|
+ |
.
|

\
|
= 4 = 2
and unit vector along

=
| |

i
3
2
+

j
3
1

k
3
2
.

6. Two different packs of cards are shuffled together.
Cards are dealt equally among 4 players, each getting
13 cards. In how many ways can a player get his
cards if no two cards are from the same suit with the
same denomination?
Sol. Here, there are 52 distinct cards, each card being 2 in
number. As not two cards are to be of the same suit
with the same denomination (i.e., two cards are
identical), 13 cards are to be selected from 52 cards
where each card is two in number.
The number of selection of 13 cards from 52 distinct
cards =
52
C
13
.
But each of the 13 cards can be selected in 2 ways
(belonging to either of the two packs).
the required number of ways
=
52
C
13
2
13
=
! 39 ! 13
! 52
. 2
13
.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 42 JUNE 2011
















Meaning of inverse function :
1. sin = x sin
1
x =
2. cos = x cos
1
x =
3. tan = x tan
1
x =
4. cot = x cot
1
x =
5. sec = x sec
1
x =
6. cosec = x cosec
1
x =
Domains and Range of Functions :

Function Domain Range
sin
1
x 1 x 1


cos
1
x 1 x 1 0
tan
1
x < x < ,
i.e. x R

< <
2


cosec
1
x x 1, x 1
0,
2

<
2


sec
1
x x 1, x 1

2

, 0
cot
1
x < x <
i.e. x R
0 < <

Properties of Inverse Functions :
(a) 1. sin
1
(sin ) = , sin (sin
1
x) = x
2. cos
1
(cos ) = , cos (cos
1
x) = x
3. tan
1
(tan ) = , tan (tan
1
x) = x
4. cot
1
(cot ) = , cot (cot
1
x) = x
5. sec
1
(sec ) = , sec (sec
1
x) = x
6. cosec
1
(cosec ) = , cosec (cosec
1
x) = x
(b) 1. sin
1
x

= cosec
1
(1/x)
2. cos
1
x = sec
1
(1/x)
3. tan
1
x = cot
1
(1/x)
(c) 1. sin
1
(x) = sin
1
x
2. cos
1
(x) = cos
1
x
3. tan
1
(x) = tan
1
x
4. cot
1
(x) = cot
1
x
5. sec
1
(x) = sec
1
x
6. cosec
1
(x) = cosec
1
x
(d).1. sin
1
x + cos
1
x = /2
2. tan
1
x + cot
1
x = /2
3. sec
1
x + cosec
1
x = /2
Formulae for Sum and Difference of Inverse
Function
1. tan
1
x + tan
1
y =

>

+
+
<

1 xy when
xy 1
y x
tan
1 xy where
xy 1
y x
tan
1
1

2. tan
1
x tan
1
y = tan
1
xy
y x
+

1

3. sin
1
x sin
1
y = sin
1
)
`


2 2
1 1 x y y x
4. cos
1
x cos
1
y = cos
1
)
`


2 2
1 1 y x xy m
5. cot
1
x cot
1
y = cot
1
(

x y
xy 1 m

6. tan
1
x + tan
1
y + tan
1
z = tan
1
(


+ +
zx yz xy
xyz z y x
1

Some Important Results :
1. 2 sin
1
x = sin
1
2x
2
1 x
2. 2 cos
1
x = cos
1
(2x
2
1)
3. 2 tan
1
x

= tan
1
2
1
2
x
x

= sin
1
2
1
2
x
x
+
= cos
1
2
2
1
1
x
x
+


4. 3 sin
1
x = sin
1
(3x 4x
3
)
5. 3 cos
1
x = cos
1
(4x
3
3x)
6. 3 tan
1
x = tan
1

2
3
3 1
3
x
x x


7. tan
1

(
(

2 2
x a
x
= sin
1
|
.
|

\
|
a
x

8. tan
1

(
(

) 3 (
3
2 2
3 2
x a a
x x a
= 3 tan
1
|
.
|

\
|
a
x

9. tan
1

(
(

+
+ +
2 2
2 2
1 1
1 1
x x
x x
=
4

+
2
1
cos
1
x
2


INVERSE TRIGONOMETRIC
FUNCTION
Mathematics Fundamentals
M
A
T
H
S

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 43 JUNE 2011











General quadratic equation :
An equation of the form
ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 ...(1)
where a 0, is called a quadratic equation, in the real
or complex coefficients a, b and c.
Roots of a quadratic equation :
The values of x, (say x = , ) which satisfy the
quadratic equation (1) are called the roots of the
equation and they are given by
=
a
ac b b
2
4
2
+
; =
a
ac b b
2
4
2


Discriminant of a quadratic equation :
The quantity D b
2
4ac, is known as the
discriminant of the equation.
Nature of the Roots :
In the equations ax
2
+ bx + c = 0, let us suppose that
a, b, c are real and a 0. The following is true about
the nature of its roots-
(i) The equation has real and distinct roots if and only
if D b
2
4ac > 0.
(ii) The equation has real and coincident (equal) roots
if and only if D b
2
4ac = 0.
(iii) The equation has complex roots of the form
i, 0, 0 R, if and only if
D b
2
4ac < 0.
(iv) The equation has rational roots if and only if a, b,
c Q (the set of rational numbers) and
D b
2
4ac is a perfect square (of a rational
number).
(v) The equation has (unequal) irrational (surd form)
roots if and only if D b
2
4ac > 0 and not a
perfect square even if a, b and c are rational. In
this case if p + q , p, q rational, is an irrational
root, then P q is also a root (a, b, c being
rational).
(vi) + i ( 0 and , R) is a root if and only
if its conjugate i is a root, that is complex
roots occur in pairs in a quadratic equation. In
case the equations is satisfied by more than two
complex numbers, then it reduces to an identitiy.
0.x
2
+ 0.x + 0 = 0, i.e. a = 0 = b = c.

Relation between Roots and Coefficients :
If , are the roots of the quadratic equation
ax
2
+ bx + c = 0, then the sum and product of the
roots is
+ =
a
b
and =
a
c

Hence the quadratic equation whose roots are and
is given by
x
2
( + )x + = 0 or (x ) (x ) = 0
Condition that the two quadratic equations have a
common root :
Let be a common root of two quadratic equations
a
1
x
2
+ b
1
x + c
1
= 0 and a
2
x
2
+ b
2
x + c
2
= 0
where a
1
0, a
2
0 and a
1
b
2
a
2
b
1
0.
Then a
1

2
+ b
1
+ c
1
= 0 and a
2

2
+ b
2
+ c
2
= 0
which gives (by cross multipication),

1 2 2 1
2
c b c b

=
1 2 2 1
a c a c

=
1 2 2 1
1
b a b a

Thus eliminating , the condition for a common root
is given by
(c
1
a
2
c
2
a
1
)
2
= (b
1
c
2
b
2
c
1
) (a
1
b
2
a
2
b
1
) ...(2)
Condition that the two quadratic equations have both
the roots common :
The two quadratic equation will have the same roots
if and only if their coefficients are proportional, i.e.

2
1
a
a
=
2
1
b
b
=
2
1
c
c

Descarte's rule of signs :
The maximum number of positive of a polynomial
f (x) is the number of changes of signs in f (x) and the
maximum number of negative roots of f(x) is the
number of changes of signs in f (x).
Position of roots :
If f (x) = 0 is an equation and a, b are two real
numbers such that f (a) f (b) < 0, then the equation
f (x) = 0 has at least one real root or an odd number of
real roots between a and b. In case f (a) and f (b) are
of the same sign, then either no real root or an even
number of real roots of f (x) = 0 lie between a and b.

QUADRATIC EQUATION
Mathematics Fundamentals
M
A
T
H
S

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 44 JUNE 2011
The quadratic expression :
(A) Let f (x) ax
2
+ bx + c, a, b, c R, a > d be a
quadratic expression. Since,
f (x) = a

|
|
.
|

\
|

|
.
|

\
|
+
2
2
2
4
4
2
a
ac b
a
b
x ...(3)
The following is true from equation (3)
(i) f (x) > 0 (< 0) for all values of x R if and only if
a > 0 (< 0) and D b
2
4ac < 0.
(ii) f (x) 0 ( 0) if and only if a > 0 (< 0) and
D b
2
4ac = 0.
In this case (D = 0 ), f (x) = 0 if and only if x =
a
b
2

(iii) If D b
2
4ac > 0 and a > 0 (< 0), then
f (x) =

= = =
= < >
= > <
0 f(x) of roots the of each for x 0,
0 f(x) of roots e between th lying not for x 0), 0(
0 f(x) of roots e between th lying x for ), 0 ( 0

(iv) If a > 0, (< 0), then f (x) has a minimum
(maximum) value at x =
a
b
2
and this value is
given by
[f(x)]
min (max)
=
a
b ac
4
4
2


(B) The sign of the expression :
(i) The value of expression (x a) (x b); (a < b) is
positive if x < a or x > b, in other words x does
not lie between a and b.
(ii) The expression (x a) (x b); (a < b) is negative
if a < x < b i.e. if x lies between a and b.
Some important results :
If f () = 0 and f () = 0, then is a repeated root of
the quadratic equation f (x) = 0 and f (x) = a(x )
2
.
In fact =
a
b
2
.
Imaginary and irrational roots occur in conjugate
pairs (when a, b, c R or a, b, c being rational) i.e.,
if 3 + 2i or 5 7 2 is a root then 3 2i or
5 + 7 2 will also be a root.
For the quadratic equation ax
2
+ bx + c = 0
(i) One root will be reciprocal of the other if a = c.
(ii) One root is zero if c = 0
(iii) Roots are equal in magnitude but opposite in sign
if b = 0.
(iv) Both roots are zero if b = c = 0.
(v) Roots are positive if a and c are of the same sign
and b is of the opposite sign.
(vi) Roots are of opposite sign if a and c are of
opposite sign.
(vii) Roots are negative if a, b, c are of the same sign.
If the ratio of roots of the quadratic equation
ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 be p : q, then pqb
2
= (p + q)
2
ac.
If one root of the quadratic equation ax
2
+ bx + c = 0
be p : q, then pqb
2
= (p + q)
2
ac.
If one root of the quadratic equation ax
2
+ bx + c = 0
is equal to the n
th
power of the other, then

1
1
) (
+ n
n
ac +
1
1
) (
+ n
n
c a + b = 0
If one roots of the equation ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 be n
times the other root, then nb
2
= ac(n + 1)
2
.
If the roots of the equation ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 are of the
form
k
k 1 +
and
1
2
+
+
k
k
, then (a + b + c)
2
= b
2
4ac.
If the roots of ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 are , , then the
roots of cx
2
+ bx + a = 0 will be

1
,

1
.
The roots of the equation ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 are
reciprocal to ax
2
+ bx + c = 0 if
(cc aa)
2
= (ba cb) (ab bc).
Let f (x) = ax
2
+ bx + c, where a > 0 .Then
(i) Conditions for both the roots of f (x) = 0 to be
greater than a given number K are b
2
4ac 0;
f (K) > 0;
a
b
2

> K.
(ii) The number K lies between the roots of f (x) = 0
if f (K) < 0.'
(iii) Condition for exactly one root of f (x) = 0 to lie
between d and e is f (d) f (e) < 0.



















Puzzle : 5 Pirates

5 pirates of different ages have a treasure of 100
gold coins.
On their ship, they decide to split the coins using
this scheme:
The oldest pirate proposes how to share the coins,
and all pirates remaining will vote for or against it.
If 50% or more of the pirates vote for it, then the
coins will be shared that way. Otherwise, the
pirate proposing the scheme will be thrown
overboard, and the process is repeated with the
pirates that remain. Assuming that all 5 pirates
are intelligent, rational, greedy, and do not wish
to die, (and are rather good at math for pirates)
what will happen?
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 45 JUNE 2011

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 46 JUNE 2011

























PHYSICS


Questions 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.

1. A plastic ball is suspended inside liquid filled in a
closed cylindrical container shown in figure. The
elongation in spring is 1 mm. The cylinder is now
rotated about vertical axis shown with angular
velocity =
a
g
. Assuming that length of spring
b < < a, elongation in spring will be

a
b


(A) 1.7 mm (B) 2 mm
(C) 1 mm (D) 1.4 mm

2. A ring of mass 'M' and radius 'R'
is slipped into cone kept on a
horizontal surface. The cone is
accelerated towards right with
acceleration 'a'. There is no
friction between ring and the
cone. Tension in ring at point A
is -
(A)
2
Ma
(B)


2
cot Mg

(C)

+
2
) cot g a ( M
(D)

+
2
) tan g a ( M


3. Let E
1
and E
2
denotes gravitational field at distance
'r
1
' and 'r
2
' from axes of infinitely long solid
cylinder of radius 'R'. Which of the following must
hold true -
(A) E
1
< E
2
if r
1
< r
2
< R
(B) E
1
> E
2
if R < r
1
< r
2

(C) E
1
> E
2
if r
1
= R E, r
2
= R + E (E is +ve
constant < R)
(D) All

IIT-JEE 2012
XtraEdge Test Series # 2
Based on New Pattern
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus : Physics : Laws of motion, Friction, Work Power Energy, Gravitation, S.H.M., Laws of Conservations of
Momentum, Rotational Motion (Rigid Body), Elasticity, Fluid Mechanics, Surface Tension, Viscosity, Refl. At Plane surface,
Ref. at Curved surface, Refraction at Plane surface, Prism (Deviation & Dispersion), Refraction at Curved surface, Wave Nature
of Light: Interference. Chemistry : Gaseous state, Chemical Energetics, Oxidation-Reduction, Equivalent Concept, Volumetric
Analysis, Reaction Mechanism, Alkane, Alkene, Alkyne, Alcohol, Ether & Phenol, Practical Organic Chemistry, Aromatic
Hydrocarbons, Halogen Derivatives, Carboxylic Acid & Its Derivatives, Nitrogen Compounds, Amines, Carbohydrates, Amino
Acid, Protein & Polymers. Mathematics: Logarithm & Modulus Function, Quadratic Equation, Progressions, Binomial
Theorem, Permutation & Combination, Complex Number, Indefinite Integration, Definite Integration, Area Under the Curve,
Defferential Equations.
Instructions : [Each subject contain]
Section I : Question 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be
awarded for correct answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
Section II : Question 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions with multiple correct answer. +4 marks will be
awarded for correct answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer.
Section III : Question 13 to 14 are Column Matching type questions. +8 marks will be awarded for the complete
correctly matched answer and +2 mark for wrong answer. However, +1 mark will be given for a
correctly marked answer in any row.
Section IV : Question 15 to 20 are Numerical Response Question (single digit Ans. type) +4 marks will be
awarded for correct answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer.


A
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 47 JUNE 2011
4. Figure shows a body of arbitrary shape. 'O' is the
centre of mass of the body and mass of the body is
M. If
' CC
I

= I
0
then
' AA
I will be equal to -
d
A C
A' C'
d
O

(A)
' CC
I + Md
2
(B)
' CC
I Md
2
(C)
' CC
I + 3 Md
2
(D)
' CC
I + 4 Md
2

5. Two identical prisms with slightly different indices
are located as shown. Angle is small. When a
laser beam strike one of the prisms perpendicular to
the surface, the refracted ray is deviated by a small
angle . Find the difference between the indices of
refraction of the prism in term of & -





(A)

(B)


(C)

2
(D)

2


6. In a Young's double slit experiment, green light is
incident on the two slits. The interference pattern is
observed on a screen. Which of the following
changes would cause the observed fringes to be
more closely spaced -
fringes


(A) Reducing the separation between the slits
(B) Using blue light instead of green light.

(C) Used red light instead of green light
(D) Moving the light source further away from the
slits

7. In the given figure ABC is a right angled isosceles
prism kept in air. A ray of light is incident on it
normally as shown in figure. Refractive index of
the prism is varying with time t as = 1 + 0.4 t
here t is in seconds. The angular velocity of the
emergent ray at time t = 1 sec is
A
B C
(A) 1.2 rad/sec (B) 1 rad/sec

(C)2 rad/sec (D) 1.5 rad/sec

8. When a thin transparent sheet of refractive index
=
2
3
is placed near one of the slits in young
double slit experiment, the intensity at the centre of
the screen reduces to half of the maximum
intensity. The minimum thickness of the sheet
should be -
(A)
4

(B)
8

(C)
2

(D)
3



Questions 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) may be
correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against
the question number of that question. +4 marks will
be given for each correct answer and no negative
marks for wrong answer.
9. For a particle undergoing S.H.M. -
(A) Total mechanical energy must be conserved in
a round trip
(B) Total mechanical energy must be conserved
throughout the motion.
(C) Minimum potential energy must correspond
maximum Kinetic energy
(D) Minimum Kinetic energy may correspond
maximum potential energy
10. A body starting from rest is moved along straight
line by a machine delivering constant power.
Choose the correct graph -
(A)

s
K
(B)

t
K

(C)

t
v
(D)

t
s



XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 48 JUNE 2011
11. Two converging lens have focal length 20 cm & 30
cm, optical axis of both lens coincide. This lens
system is used to form an image of an object, it
turn out that size of the image does not depend on
the distance between the lens system & the object.
If L is distance between lens & M is magnification
after all possible refraction -

f = 20 cm f = 30 cm
O
L

(A) L = 10 cm (B) L = 50 cm

(C) | M | =
2
3
(D) | M | =
3
2

12. Consider a coaxial system of two thin convex lens
of focal length f each separated by a distance d -

d

(A) if d < f system will behave as convex lens of
focal length > f
(B) if d < f system will behave as convex lens of
focal length < f

(C) if f < d < 2f system will behave as convex lens
of focal length > f
(D) if d = 2f system will behave as simple glass
plate.
This section contains 2 questions. Each question has
four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column-I
and five statements (P, Q, R, S and T) in Column-II.
Any given statement in ColumnI can have correct
matching with One or More statement(s) given in
Column II. For example, if for a given question,
statement B matches with the statements given in Q
and R, then for the particular question, against
statement B, darken the bubbles corresponding to Q
and R in the OMR. +8 marks will be given for each
correct answer (i.e. +2 marks for each correct row)
and no negative marking for each wrong answer.
13. Column-I contains different arrangements and
column-II contains capillary rise of water in those
arrangements. Surface tension of water is S and
density is ''. Match the following -
Column-I Column-II
(A) Silver tube of radius (P)
g R
S 2


R immersed in water
(B) Glass tube of radius (Q)
g R
S 4


R immersed in water
(C) Hollow co-axial (R)
g R 2
S 3


cylinder made of glass,
having inner and outer
radius R and 2R respectively
immersed in water
(D) Two parallel glass (S) Zero
plate separated by
distance 'R'
immersed in water (T) None

14. Light rays are incident on devices which may cause
either reflection or refraction both. The natures of
the incident light and the devices are described in
column I. Some possible results of this on the rays
are given in column II.
Column-I Column-II
(A) A ray of white light (P) Divergent
is incident on one face beam
of an equilateral prism.
(B) A ray of white light (Q) Total internal
is incident at an angle reflection
on a thick glass sheet.
(C) A ray of white light (R) Lateral shift
passes from optically
denser medium to rarer
medium.
(D) A parallel beam of (S) Dispersion
monochromatic
light passes symmetrically
through a glass lens. (T) None


This section contains 6 questions (Q.15 to 20). The
answer to each of the questions is a Single-digit
integer, ranging from 0 to 9. The bubble
corresponding to the correct answer is to be darkened
in the OMR. +4 marks will be given for each correct
answer and no negative marking for each wrong
answer.
15. An over head tank of capacity 10 k litre is kept at
the top of building 15 m high. Water falls in tank
with speed 2 5 m/s. Water level is at a depth
5 m below ground. The tank is to be filled in
1/2 hr. If efficiency of pump is 67.5% electric
power used in hecto watt is -

30
1
2


16. A wire of length 2m is clamped horizontally
between two fixed support. A mass m = 5kg is
hanged from middle of wire. The vertical and
depression in wire (in cm) in equilibrium is
(Young modulus of wire = 2.4 10
9
N/m
2
,
cross-sectional area = 1 cm
2
)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 49 JUNE 2011
17. A cube of mass 3kg is kept on a frictionless
horizontal surface. The block is given an impulse
so that point A acquires velocity 4 m/s in the
direction shown. If speed of point B is 2 4 m/s,
K.E. of block (in Joule) minus 10 Joule is -

10 cm
4 m/s
B A

18. A ray of light from a liquid ( = 3 ) is incident on
a system of two right angled prism of refractive
indices 3 & 2 as shown. The ray suffers zero
deviation when emerges into air from CD. The
angle of incidence i is . 9.

= 2
3
= 3
i

19. When an object is placed at a distance of 25 cm
from a mirror, the magnification is m
1
. The object
is moved 15 cm away with respect to the earlier
position along principal axis, magnification
becomes m
2
. If m
1
m
2
= 4, the focal length of the
mirror in cm is. 10 cm.

20. A uniform horizontal beam of light is incident upon
a prism as shown. The prism is in the shape of a
quarter cylinder of radius R = 5 cm and has index
of refraction = 1.5. A patch on the table top for a
distance x from the cylinder is unilluminated. The
value of x in cm is.
R
x


CHEMISTRY

Questions 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.
1. A perfect gas exerting a pressure P atm and has
density (gL
1
). A plot of (P ) Versus P at
constant T is drawn if
atm 21 . 8 p
) P (
dp
d
=
(

= 5 then
the value of T is [Molar mass of gas = 4 g mol
1
]
(A) 40 K (B) 640 K
(C) 160 K (D) 320 K

2. A solution of 500 ml of 0.2 M KOH and 500 ml of
0.2 M HCl is mixed and stirred; the rise in
temperature is T
1
. The experiment is repreated
using 250 ml each of solution, the temperature
raised is T
2
. Which of the following is true -
(A) T
1
= T
2
(B) T
1
= 2T
2
(C) T
1
= 4T
2
(D) T
2
= 9T
1


3. In the reaction,
3Br
2
+ 6CO
3
2
+ 3H
2
O
5Br

+ BrO
3

+ 6HCO
3


(A) Bromine is oxidised and carbonate is reduced
(B) Bromine is oxidised as well as reduced
(C) Bromine is reduced and water is oxidised
(D) Br
2
is neither oxidised nor reduced

4. Identify the most stable conformation -
(A)
CH
3
CH
2

H
H
H
(B)
CH
3
CH
2

H
H
H

(C)

CH
3
CH
2
H
H
H
(D)
Me
CH
2

H
H
H


5. Which of the following alcohols would you expect
to form a corbocation most readily in H
2
SO
4
-
(A)
OH


(B)
OH



(C)
OH
O


(D)
OH



XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 50 JUNE 2011
6. Identify the set of reagents/ reaction conditions X
and Y in the following set of transformations
[IIT - 2002]
CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
Br
X

Product
Y

CH
3
CHCH
3
Br

(A) X = dilute aqueous NaOH, 20C ; Y = HBr /
acetic acid, 20C
(B) X = concentrated alcoholic NaOH, 80C ;
Y = HBr / acetic acid, 20
(C) X = dilute aqueous NaOH, 20C ; Y = Br
2
/
CHCl
3
, 0C
(D) X = concentrated alcoholic NaOH, 80C ;
Y = Br
2
/CHCl
3
, 0C

7. Propenal principally undergo nucleophilic addition
reaction because
(A) Conjugation leads to generation of carbocation
(B) Conjugation leads to formation of carbonion
(C) Presence of carbonyl group make double bond
of alkene less reactive
(D) None of these

8. An alkaline solution of potassium mercuric iodide
is known as -
(A) Nesslers reagent
(B) Lassaignes reagent
(C) Fentons reagent
(D) None of the above

Questions 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) may be
correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against
the question number of that question. +4 marks will
be given for each correct answer and no negative
marks for wrong answer.

9.
(I)
T
1
P
1
(II)
T
2
P
2
Insulation
Porous plate

The given system is completely thermally
insulated. P
2
< P
1
and T
2
< T
1
consider molar
volume at P
1
, T
1
is
1
V and molar volume at P
2
, T
2

is
2
V . 1 mole of gas is transferred from piston (I)
to piston (II) As per the given figure -
(A) work done on the gas in piston (I) is P
1
1
V and
work done by the gas in piston (II) is P
2 2
V
(B) Net work done, w =
1 1
V P
2 2
V P

(C) The given process is constant enthalpic process.
(D) For the given process the change in internal
energy, E 0

10.

CH
3
Br

BuOK t
Product. Choose the
correct statement
(A)

CH
3

is an endocyclic seytzeff product
(B)

CH
2
is an exocyclic seytzeff product
(C)

CH
3
is an endocyclic Hofmann product
(D)

CH
2
is an exocyclic Hofmann
product

11. Choose the correct statement for the following
compound


O
CH
2
OH
H
OH
O
OH H
O
CH
2
OH
H
OH
O
OH H
O
H H
CH
2
OH
H
OH
O
OH H
O
H
H H
H
H
H

(A) this carbohydrate is a polymer of D glucose
(B) it has (1, 4) glycosidic linkage
(C) it is a non reducing carbohydrate
(D) it does not give fehling test

12. The correct orders are -
(A)

NO
2
COOH
CH
3
CH
3
>
NO
2

COOH
CH
3

CH
3

(Acidic strength)
(B)
NO
2
OH
NO
2 NO
2
>
COOH
OH
NO
2

NO
2

(Acidic strength)
(C)

NO
2
NH
2

<

NO
2
NH
2

(Basic strength)
(D)
OH
NO
2
<

NO
2
OH

(Boiling point)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 51 JUNE 2011
This section contains 2 questions. Each question has
four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column-I
and five statements (P, Q, R, S and T) in Column-II.
Any given statement in ColumnI can have correct
matching with One or More statement(s) given in
Column II. For example, if for a given question,
statement B matches with the statements given in Q
and R, then for the particular question, against
statement B, darken the bubbles corresponding to Q
and R in the OMR. +8 marks will be given for each
correct answer (i.e. +2 marks for each correct row)
and no negative marking for each wrong answer.
13. Match the column :
Column - I Column - II
(A) Hoffmann degradation (P) Aldehyde &
1 amine
(B) Curtius rearrangement (Q) Iso cyanate
(C) Lossen rearrangement (R) Br
2
+ NaOH
(D) Hemiaminal (S)

RCN
3

O


(T) 2 amine




14. Match the column:
Column-I Column-II
(For a definite amount of (Enthalpy change /
an ideal gas) work done)
(A)

1 12
2
V
2V
0 V
0

2P
0
P
0
P
(P) H > 0
(B)

2
Adiabatic
1
V
16V
0 V
0

32P
0
P
0
P
= 5/4
(Q) H = 0
(C)

1
2

P
T
(R) W > 0
(D)

1
2
P
T
(S) W < 0
(T) W = 0

This section contains 6 questions (Q.15 to 20). The
answer to each of the questions is a Single-digit integer,
ranging from 0 to 9. The bubble corresponding to the
correct answer is to be darkened in the OMR. +4
marks will be given for each correct answer and no
negative marking for each wrong answer.
15. A gas is heated in a cyllinder fitted with a nozzle
from 27C for 20 minutes. It is found that
3
2
rd of
the original gas is diffused out through the nozzle.
What would be the difference in temperature (give
your answer in terms of multiples of 100K)
between initial and final states ?

16 In the following sequence of reactions the reducing
and oxidising agents are properly mentioned
A
5+
(I)

Sn
2+
Sn
4+
A
m+
(II)

N
2
H
4

N
2
A
n+
(III)

I
2
I

A
p+
Initially we have taken 10
2
mole of A
5+
. In
reaction (I) number moles of Sn
2+
required
= 5 10
3
moles.
In reaction (II) the number of moles of N
2
H
4

required = 2.5 10
3
moles.
In reaction (III) the number of moles of I
2
required
= 5 10
3
moles
Determine the value of p.

17 A sample consisting of chlorate brown powder of
PbO
2
is allowed to react with excess of KI and
iodine liberated is reacted with N
2
H
4
in another
container. The volume of gas liberated from this
second container at STP was measured out to be
1.12 litre. Find out volume (in litres) of decimolar
NaOH required to dissolve PbO
2
completely.
(Assume all reactions are 100% complete)

18. The weight of a hydrated dibasic acid required for
the complete neutralisation of 48 ml of 1N
Ca(OH
2
) is 4.8 gram. When 2.5 gram of the
hydrated acid is strongly heated to a constant
weight, it gives 1.825 gram of the anhydrous acid.
Find out number of water molecules per molecule
of hydrated acid

19. Which nitrogen in LSD (Lysergic acid
diethylamide) is most basic ?
H N
N
2
C N (C
2
H
5
)
2
O
1
CH
3
3


20. P toluidine reacts with benzene diazonium
chloride to form compound which on boiling with
Aq. H
2
SO
4
give How many product.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 52 JUNE 2011
MATHEMATICS

Questions 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.
1.
Value of

= +
+
+
+

n
r r
r
r
n r
C
C
0 1
2
1
1
) 1 (
equals -
(A)
1
2
+
+
n
n
(B)
2
1
+
+
n
n

(C
)
3
1
+
+
n
n
(D)
1
3
+
+
n
n


2. The value of a for which equation ln (alnx) = lnx
has a solution is-
(A) e (B) 1/e (C) e
2
(D) e
3


3.
If

) (
1
x f
dx = ln (f(x))
2
+ C & f (2) = 2,
then number of solution (s) of the equation
sgn (ln (f |x|)) = 1 x
2
is -
(A) 0 (B) 1 (C
) 2
(D) infinite

4.
Let I
1
=

+
(

3
0
3
1
sin
x
x
dx and I
2
=

+
(

0
3
3
1
sin
x
x
dx, where
[.] represents greatest integer function, then-
(A) I
1
= I
2
(B) I
1
+ I
2
= 0
(C
) I
1
= 2I
2

(D) 2I
1
= 3I
2


5.
The area bounded by y = x
2
+ 2 and
y = 2 |x| cos x is equal to -

(A)
3
2
(B)
3
8
(C
)
3
4
(D)
3
1


6.
The solution of the differential equation
dx
dy
=
y x y
x y
cos 2 sin
sin

+
is -
(A) sin
2
y = x sin y +
2
x
2
+ C
(B) sin
2
y = x sin y
2
x
2
+ C
(C
) sin
2
y = x + sin y +
2
x
2
+ C
(D) sin
2
y = x sin y +
2
x
2
+ C
7. The maximum area of the triangle formed by the
complex coordinates z, z
1
, z
2
which satisfy the
relations |z z
1
| = |z z
2
|, |
.
|

\
| +
2

2 1
z z
z r, where
r > |z
1
z
2
| is -
(A)
2
1
|z
1
z
2
|
2
(B)
2
1
|z
1
z
2
|r
(C)
2
1
|z
1
z
2
|
2
r
2
(D)
2
1
|z
1
z
2
|r
2


8. A delegation of five students is to be formed from a
group of 10 students. If three particular students
want to remain together whereas two particular
students do not want to remain together then the
number of selections is -
(A) 10 (B) 20
(C) 30 (D) none of these

Questions 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) may be
correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against
the question number of that question. +4 marks will
be given for each correct answer and no negative
marks for wrong answer.

9.
The orthogonal trajectories of the system of curves
2
|
.
|

\
|
dx
dy
=
x
4
are -
(A) 9 (y + c)
2
= x
3
(B) y + c =
3
2 / 3
x

(C
) y + c =
3
2 / 3
x

(D) All of these

10.
If I
n
=

4 /
0
]) [ ( (tan x x
n
+ tan
n2
(x [x])) dx and
n N; n 2, where [.] denotes greatest integer
function, then -
(A)
100
I
1

99
I
1
= 1 (B) I
2
, I
3
, I
4
... are in H.P.
(C
) I
2
, I
3
, I
4
... are in A.P.
(D)

=
n
2 i
i
I
1
=
2
) 1 n ( n


11. Let 'z' be a complex number and 'a' be a real
parameter such that z
2
+ az + a
2
= 0, then
(A) locus of z is a pair of straight lines
(B) locus of z is a circle
(C) arg(z) =
3
2

(D) |z| = |a|
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 53 JUNE 2011
12. 'n' locks and 'n' corres ponding keys are available.
But the actual combination is not known. The
maximum numbers of trails are needed to assign
the keys to their corresponding locks are -
(A)
n
C
2
(B)

=
n
k
k
2
) 1 (
(C) n! (D)
n+1
C
2

This section contains 2 questions. Each question has
four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column-I
and five statements (P, Q, R, S and T) in Column-II.
Any given statement in ColumnI can have correct
matching with One or More statement(s) given in
Column II. For example, if for a given question,
statement B matches with the statements given in Q
and R, then for the particular question, against
statement B, darken the bubbles corresponding to Q
and R in the OMR. +8 marks will be given for each
correct answer (i.e. +2 marks for each correct row)
and no negative marking for each wrong answer.

13. Column-I Column-II
(A) (x2) is a common factor of (P) 4
expression x
2
+ ax + b &
x
2
+ cx + d where a c, b d
then
a c
d b

is equal to
(B) If number of ways of arranging (Q) 5
letter of word CHEEKU is 3(k!)
then k equals
(C) Last non zero digit in 21! is (R) 2
(D) If nN then remainder when

(S) 0
(37)
n + 2
+ (16)
n + 1
+ (30)
n

is divided by 7 is (T) 3

14. Column-I Column-II
(A) If =


1
0
| 2 sin | dx x , then (P) 4
is equal to
(B) If area between the curves (Q) 7
y = cos
1

|
|
.
|

\
|
+

2
2
1
1
x
x
and y = x
2


is a .
4

ln2
b
then a
b
is
(C) If f (x) =


x x
x x
3 tan
5 sin ) 2 cos 1 (
2
dx, (R) 5
then
0
lim
x
|
.
|

\
|
) (
2
3
x f is equal to
(D) If


6
0
] 3 [ 3 x x
e dx = p (e q), (S) 2
where [.] denotes greatest
integer function then p + q is (T) 6
This section contains 6 questions (Q.15 to 20). The
answer to each of the questions is a Single-digit
integer, ranging from 0 to 9. The bubble
corresponding to the correct answer is to be darkened
in the OMR. +4 marks will be given for each correct
answer and no negative marking for each wrong
answer.
15. Value of sum
k n
k
n k
+

=

2
1 1
is

16. No. of terms with integral coefficients in expansion
of (5
1/3
3
1/4
x
2
)
296
is 4k + 1 then k equals.

17. If a
2
+ b = 2 then maximum value of term
independent of x in expression of (ax
1/6
+ bx
1/3
)
9

(a > 0, b > 0) is 9
k
+ k + 1, then value of k is

18. If the solution of the differential equation
sec
2
y
dx
dy
+ 2x tany = x
3
is 2 tany = (x
2
1) +
2
x
ce

,
where c is arbitrary constant, then numerical value
of is equal to.

19. Let y = f (x) be a differentiable curve
satisfying

x
dt t f
2
) ( =
2
2
x
+

2
2
) (
x
dt t f t , then


+ + +
4 /
4 /
2
3 9
cos
1 ) (
dx
x
x x x x f
is equal to.
20. If area bounded by y =
2
4 x
a
+
(a > 0) and y = c(c 0)
is an even prime integer then [a] + [c] is equal to,
where [.] represents greatest integer function.



















Puzzle : Crates of Fruit

You are on an island and there are three crates
of fruit that have washed up in front of you.
One crate contains only apples. One crate
contains only oranges. The other crate contains
both apples and oranges.
Each crate is labeled. One reads "apples", one
reads "oranges", and one reads "apples and
oranges". You know that NONE of the crates
have been labeled correctly - they are all
wrong.
If you can only take out and look at just one of
the pieces of fruit from just one of the crates,
how can you label ALL of the crates correctly?
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 54 JUNE 2011











































PHYSICS


Questions 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.
1. Given
( ) ( )
2 2

F = xy j i x y

+
newton. Find the work
done by F

when a particle is taken along the


semicircular path OAB where the co-ordinates of B
are (4, 0).-
(A)
J
3
65

(B)
J
2
75

(C)
J
4
73
(D) 0 J

2. The minimum work done by the agent, in pulling a
small particle of mass m from A to B as shown in
figure, is -
B
R
m
smooth
A
agent

(A) 4 mgR (B) mgR
(C) 3mgR (D) 2mgR

3. A solid ball of radius 0.2m and mass 1kg lying at
rest on a smooth horizontal surface is given an
instantaneous impulse of 50 N-s at point P as
shown. The number of rotations made by the ball
about its diameter before hitting the ground is -
50N-s
P
30

(A)
625 3
2

(B)
2500 3
2


(C)
3125 3
2
(D)
1250 3
2


4. At time t = 0, a horizontal disc starts rotating with
angular acceleration 1 rad/sec
2
about an axis
perpendicular to its plane and passing though its
center. A small block is lying on this disc at a
distance 0.5 m from center, coefficient of friction
between surface of block and disc is 0.255. The
block will start slipping on the disc at time t, is
approximately equal to -
(A) 2 3 s (B) 2 2 s
(C) 6 s (D) 5 s

5. A uniform rod of mass m and length l starts
rotating with constant angular acceleration in a
horizontal plane about a fixed vertical axis passing
through one end. The horizontal component of the
net force exerted on the rod by the axis when it has
rotated by an angle /2, is -
Time : 3 Hours
Syllabus : Physics : Laws of motion, Friction, Work Power Energy, Gravitation, S.H.M., Laws of Conservations of
Momentum, Rotational Motion (Rigid Body), Elasticity, Fluid Mechanics, Surface Tension, Viscosity. Chemistry : Gaseous
state, Chemical Energetics, Oxidation-Reduction, Equivalent Concept, Volumetric Analysis. Mathematics: Logarithm &
Modulus Function, Quadratic Equation, Progressions, Binomial Theorem, Permutation & Combination, Complex Number
Instructions : [Each subject contain]
Section I : Question 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions with only one correct answer. +3 marks will be awarded
for correct answer and -1 mark for wrong answer.
Section II : Question 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions with multiple correct answer. +4 marks will be awarded
for correct answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer.
Section III : Question 13 to 14 are Column Matching type questions. +8 marks will be awarded for the complete
correctly matched answer and +2 mark for wrong answer. However, +1 mark will be given for a
correctly marked answer in any row.
Section IV : Question 15 to 20 are Numerical Response Question (single digit Ans. type) +4 marks will be awarded
for correct answer and No Negative marks for wrong answer.
IIT-JEE 2013
XtraEdge Test Series # 2
Based on New Pattern
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 55 JUNE 2011
(A)
m
2

l
(B)
2
m 1
2
+
l

(C)
m
2
l
(D) none of these

6. A simple pendulum is attached to the roof of a
stationary elevator. If the time period of oscillation
is T when it is stationary, what will be time period
of oscillation when the elevator falls freely -
(A) 0 (B)
T
2

(C) 2T (D) none of these

7. A projectile is projected in the earths gravitational
with initial kinetic energy E. The horizontal of the
projectile range is R. If the mass of the projectile is
1 kg then the angle of projection of the projectile
will be equal to
(A) ( ) E 2 / gR sin
1
(B) ( ) E 2 / gR sin 2
1

(C) ( ) E 2 / gR sin 5 . 0
1
(D) ( ) E 2 / gR sin 4
1


8. The end A of a ladder AP of length 5 m, kept
inclined to a vertical wall is slipping over a
horizontal surface with velocity of 2 m/s, when A is
at a distance of 3m from the wall. Velocity of C.M.
at this moment is
A
O
P
2m/s
3m
(A) 1.25 m/s (B) 0 m/s
(C) 1 m/s (D) 2 m/s

Questions 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) may be
correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against
the question number of that question. +4 marks will
be given for each correct answer and no negative
marks for wrong answer.

9. When a uniform body is in pure rolling on a
horizontal surface -
(A) its point of contact slips with respect to the
surface
(B) its point of contact moves with the speed of the
surface
(C) its centre of mass moves along a straight line
(D) its top most point always move faster than the
lowest point of contact
10. The position vector of a particle that is moving in
three dimensions is given by -
2

r (1 2cos 2 t)i (3sin t) j (3t)k = + + +
r

in the ground frame. All units are in SI. Choose the
correct statement(s) -
(A) The particle executes SHM in the ground frame
about the mean position |
.
|

\
|
t 3 ,
2
3
, 1 .
(B) The particle executes SHM in a frame moving
along the zaxis with a velocity of 3 m/s.
(C) The amplitude of the SHM of the particle is
5
m
2
.
(D) The direction of the SHM of the particle is
given by the vector
4 3

i j
5 5
| |

|
\ .
.

11. A ball of mass 1 kg is thrown up with an initial
speed of 4 m/s. A second ball of mass 2 kg is
released from rest from some height as shown in
the figure -

4 m/s
1 kg
2 kg
u = 0


(A) The centre of mass of the two balls comes
down with acceleration g /3
(B) The centre of mass first moves up and then
comes down
(C) The acceleration of the centre of mass is g
downwards
(D) The centre of mass of the two balls remains
stationary

12. Figure shows a block P of mass m resting on a
horizontal smooth floor at a distance l from a rigid
wall. Block is pushed toward right by a distant
2
3l

and released. When block passes from its mean
position another block of mass m
1
is placed on it
which sticks to it due to friction so that the
combined block just collides with the left wall -

l
m
P
k

(A)
1
5m
m
8
=
(B)
1
5m
m
4
=

(C) Velocity of block m at mean position is
m
k
2
3l

(D) Velocity of block m at mean position is
m
k
4
3l




XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 56 JUNE 2011
This section contains 2 questions. Each question has
four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column-I
and five statements (P, Q, R, S and T) in Column-II.
Any given statement in ColumnI can have correct
matching with One or More statement(s) given in
Column II. For example, if for a given question,
statement B matches with the statements given in Q
and R, then for the particular question, against
statement B, darken the bubbles corresponding to Q
and R in the OMR. +8 marks will be given for each
correct answer (i.e. +2 marks for each correct row)
and no negative marking for each wrong answer.
13. A uniform disc is acted upon by some forces and it
rolls on a horizontal plank without slipping from
north to south. The plank, in turn lies on a smooth
horizontal surface. Match the following regarding
this situation :
Column I Column-II
(A) Frictional force on the
disc by the surface
(P) May be directed
towards north
(B) Velocity of the
lowermost point of the
disc
(Q) May be directed
towards south
(C) Acceleration of centre
of mass of the disc
(R) May be zero
(D) Vertical component of
the acceleration of
centre of mass
(S) Must be zero

(T) None

14. A smooth ball of mass m moving with a uniform
velocity v
0
strikes a smooth uniform rod AB of
equal mass m, lying on a frictionless horizontal
table. The ball strikes the rod at one end A,
perpendicular to the rod, as shown in the figure.
The collision is perfectly elastic. Some physical
quantities pertaining to this situation are given in
Column I while their values are given in Column II,
in a different order. Match the values in Column II
and the quantities in Column I.
m
A
B
v
0
m

Column I Column-II
(A)
Final kinetic energy of ball
Initial kinetic energy of ball
(P)
2
5

(B)
Impulse delivered to the rod
Initial momentum of ball
(Q)
3
5

(C)
i
L
L
, L Angular momentum of rod
about its centre of mass, L
i
Initial
angular momentum of the ball about
the centre of mass of the rod
(R)
9
25

(D)
T
K
K
, K Final kinetic energy of
rotation of the rod, K
T
Final
kinetic energy of translation of the
rod
(S) 3



(T) None

This section contains 6 questions (Q.15 to 20). The
answer to each of the questions is a Single-digit
integer, ranging from 0 to 9. The bubble
corresponding to the correct answer is to be darkened
in the OMR. +4 marks will be given for each correct
answer and no negative marking for each wrong
answer.
15. In the shown figure, a particle of mass
M
10
strikes
the block of mass M with velocity v
0
and gets
attached to it. For what velocity v
0
(in ms
-1
), the
block B just able to leave the ground ?
(Given M = 100 gm, K = 880 N/m)
K
B
2M
M
M
10
A

16. Two uniform sphere shown in figure rotate
separately on parallel axis. The upper sphere has
angular speed
0
and lower sphere is at rest. Now
the two sphere are moved together so that their
surfaces touch. After a short time the two spheres
now in contact are rotating without slipping. Find
the final rate of rotation of upper sphere is rad/s

A
r
A
B
r
B

17. In the figure transversal lines represent
equipotential surface. A particle of mass m is
released from rest at the origin. A particle of mass
2 g is present in the field. Find the force acting
on the mass. (in dyne)
y
45
10cm 10cm
x
10cm
2
/s
2 20cm
2
/s
2
30cm
2
/s
2

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 57 JUNE 2011
18. A force is acting on a body of mass 1kg placed on
a frictionless horizontal table in x direction. Graph
between force and time is given in figure. Initially
block is at rest. The work done by the force is n
10 J find n.
F
10N
t
1J 2J

19. A body of mass 1 kg moving with a velocity of
) j 2 i (
r r
m/s collides with another body of mass
2 kg moving with a velocity of ) j 5 i 4 (
r r
m/s and
sticks to it. Find the speed of both the bodies after
the collision .

20. A frame is being made up of uniform rod of
lengths l and l/2 as shown in figure. Mass of
lengths l is m and l/2 is m/2. Find the moment of
inertia about an axis AB.
where m =
9
8
kg. and l = 1m.

l/2
l/2
l/2
l/2
l/2
l/2
F
l/2
H C
B
A
D
G
E


CHEMISTRY


Questions 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.
1. What is the volume of O
2
(g) required at STP for
the oxidation of 1L of SO
2
(g) at 298K and
1 atm ? 2 SO
2
(g) + O
2
(g) 2 SO
3
(g)
(A) equal to 0.5 L (B) greater than 0.5 L
(C) lesser than 0.5 L (D) equal to 1L

2. Two gaseous samples were analyzed. One
contained 1.2 g of carbon and 3.2 g of oxygen. The
other contained 27.3% carbon and 72.7 % oxygen.
The experimental data are in accordance with -
(A) Law of conservation of mass
(B) Law of definite proportions
(C) Law of reciprocal proportions
(D) Law of multiple proportions.
3. The reaction,
2K
2
MnO
4
+ Cl
2
2KMnO
4
+ 2KCl
is an example of -
(A) Oxidation (B) Reduction
(C) Redox (D) Chlorination

4. According to modern concept, oxidation is -
(A) Electronation
(B) Deelectronation
(C) Addition of oxygen
(D) Addition of electronegative element

5. The equivalent mass of H
3
BO
3
(M = molar mass of
H
3
BO
3
) in its reaction with NaOH to form
Na
2
B
4
O
7
is equal to -
(A) M (B) M/2 (C) M/4 (D) M/6

6. If 30 ml of H
2
(g) and 20 ml O
2
(g) under identical
conditions react to form water, what is left at the
end of the reaction ?
(A) 10 ml H
2
(B) 5 ml H
2
(C)10 ml of O
2
(D) 5 ml of O
2

7. Mole fraction of methanol in its aqueous solution
is 0.5. The concentration of solution in terms of
percent by mass of methanol is-
(A) 36 (B) 50 (C)
64 (D) 72

8. When SO
2
is passed through acidified K
2
Cr
2
O
7

solution, Cr
2
(SO
4
)
3
is formed. The change in
valency of Cr is
(A) + 4 to + 2 (B) + 5 to + 3
(C) + 6 to + 3 (D) + 7 to + 1

Questions 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) may be
correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against
the question number of that question. +4 marks will
be given for each correct answer and no negative
marks for wrong answer.

9. Rate of diffusion is/are independent on which of
the following factors ?
(A) size of the molecules
(B) attractive interaction forces among the gas
molecules
(C) molecular mass of the gas
(D) temperature of the gas

10. : When liquid solidifies, generally there is :
(A) decrease in enthalpy
(B) decrease in entropy
(C) increase in enthalpy
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 58 JUNE 2011
(D) increase in entropy
11. In an experiment, 50 ml of 0.05M solution of an
oxoacid of phosphorous neutralise exactly 100 ml
of solutlion of NaOH containing 2.0 gram per litre
of the base -
(A) The acid can form three types of salt with
NaOH
(B) The molecular formula of the acid is H
3
PO
3

(C) The acid can act as a reducing agent
(D) The acid has three OH group

12. The graph represent Boyle's law is/are

(A)

P
1

V
1

(B)

PV
P


(C)
logP
logV
(D)

V
1/P



This section contains 2 questions. Each question has
four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column-I
and five statements (P, Q, R, S and T) in Column-II.
Any given statement in ColumnI can have correct
matching with One or More statement(s) given in
Column II. For example, if for a given question,
statement B matches with the statements given in Q
and R, then for the particular question, against
statement B, darken the bubbles corresponding to Q
and R in the OMR. +8 marks will be given for each
correct answer (i.e. +2 marks for each correct row)
and no negative marking for each wrong answer.

13. Column-I Column-II
(A) For an ideal gas of (P) Depends on temperature
definite mass, PV
(B) Saturation vapour (Q) Applicable in a closed
Pressure of water container
(C) Rate of effusion (R) Depends on the number
of gas molecules
colliding with the walls
of the container in unit
time
(D) Pressure of an ideal gas (S) Constant at definite
Temperature
(T) Doesn't depend on
Temperature


14.
Column- I Column-II
(A) Process occurs
under constant
temperature
(P) Adiabatic process

(B) Process occurs
under no exchange
of heat with the
surroundings
(Q) Isothermal process
(C) Cyclic integral of
thermodynamic
function is zero
(R) Isochoric process
(D) Process occurs
under constant
volume condition

(S) Reversible process.

(T) Irreversible process.

This section contains 6 questions (Q.15 to 20). The
answer to each of the questions is a Single-digit
integer, ranging from 0 to 9. The bubble
corresponding to the correct answer is to be darkened
in the OMR. +4 marks will be given for each correct
answer and no negative marking for each wrong
answer.
15. In a container of volume 1 litre 10
23
gas molecules
are present at the r. m. s. speed equal to 10
3
m/s.
Determine the total kinetic energies of the gas
molecules in kJ in nearest possible integers.
Given : N
A
= 6 10
23
and mass of one molecule
= 10
22
gm

16. An ideal gas is taken through the cycle A B
C A as shown in the figure. If net heat
supplied to the gas in the cycle is 5J, the work done
on the gas in the process C A is J-

in m
3
1
V
2
C
B
A
P in N/m
2
10


17. Heat supplied to a carnot engine is 2 10
3
J. If the
engine work between 300 K to 600 K. The useful
work obtained form the carnot engine is KJ

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 59 JUNE 2011
18. The number of peroxolinkages present in CrO
5
is ......
.......
19. Maximum oxidation state of Xe is

20. An aquarium contains 1.1 10
2
gram oxygen
dissolved in water. If concentration of oxygen in
aquarium is 2.2 ppm, then find out volume of water
(in litre) in aquarium -


MATHEMATICS

Questions 1 to 8 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which ONLY ONE is correct. Mark your response in
OMR sheet against the question number of that
question. + 3 marks will be given for each correct
answer and 1 mark for each wrong answer.

1.
The number of real value(s) of x satisfying
(x 2) [x] = {x} 1 where [.] denotes greatest
integer function & { } denotes, fractional part
function -

(A) 2 (B) 3
(C
) infinite
(D) none

2.
Let f (x) = ax
4
+ bx
2
+ 4x + 6 & f (3) = 2286 &
f (3) = t then no. of ways in which t can be resolved
as product of two divisors which are relatively
prime -

(A) 32 (B) 16 (C
) 8
(D) none

3.
t & d (d is a variable) are n
th
term & common
difference of an A.P. If multiplication of (n 1)
th
&
(n 3)
th
term of A.P. is minimum then
d
t
equals -
(A) 5 (B)
2
5
(C
) 3
(D)
2
3


4.
Value(s) of x for which
log
1/5
(2x + 5) + log
5
(16 x
2
) 1 belongs to -

(A)
(

\
|
1 ,
2
5
(B) [1, 4)
(C
) (1, 4)
(D) |
.
|

\
|
1 ,
2
5


5. Let
A = {n: n is a multiple of 7 and n 200 and n N}
B = {n:n is a multiple of 11 and n 300 & n N}
Then number of ordered pairs (a, b) such that
a A, b B, but neither A nor B belong to A B are
(A) 650 (B) 756 (C) 624 (D) 752

6. If a
n
=

=

n
k
n
e
k n k
0
)! ( !
) 10 (log
for n 0, then
a
0
+ a
1
+ a
2
+ a
3
infinite equals to
(A) 10 (B) 100
(C) 1000 (D) None of these
7. If z is a complex number lying in the first quadrant
such that Re(z) + Im(z) = 3, then the maximum
value of {Re(z)}
2
Im(z) is -
(A) 1 (B) 2
(C) 3 (D) 4

8. A seven-digit number made up of all distinct digits
8, 7, 6, 4, 2, x and y is divisible by 3. Then possible
number of order pair (x, y) is -
(A) 4 (B) 8
(C) 2 (D) None of these

Questions 9 to 12 are multiple choice questions. Each
question has four choices (A), (B), (C) and (D), out of
which MULTIPLE (ONE OR MORE) may be
correct. Mark your response in OMR sheet against
the question number of that question. +4 marks will
be given for each correct answer and no negative
marks for wrong answer.
9.
If range of expression
7 2
12
2

x
x
is (, a] [b, )
and the solution of
b
a
ax
log
+
x
a
b
log
= b
3
is say
x = c then -
(A) (a + b) & c are both prime
(B) (a + b) & c are both coprime
(C
) a + b + c is a perfect square
(D) none

10.
A leaf is torn from a Paperback Novel. The sum of
numbers on remaining pages is 15000. Then page
nos. on torn leaf can be -

(A) 112 (B) 26
(C
) 25
(D) 113

11. If

=
n
r r
n
C
r
0
=

=
+
n
r r
n
C
n n
0
2
. 2
3 3
, then-
(A) n = 1 (B) n = 2
(C) n = 3 (D) None of these


12. (10
2n
1) is divisible by, (n N)
(A) 13 (B) 33
(C) 11 (D) None


This section contains 2 questions. Each question has
four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column-I
and five statements (P, Q, R, S and T) in Column-II.
Any given statement in ColumnI can have correct
matching with One or More statement(s) given in
Column II. For example, if for a given question,
statement B matches with the statements given in Q
and R, then for the particular question, against
statement B, darken the bubbles corresponding to Q
and R in the OMR. +8 marks will be given for each
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 60 JUNE 2011
correct answer (i.e. +2 marks for each correct row)
and no negative marking for each wrong answer.
13. Match the column -
Column-I Column-II
(A) If exactly one root of (P) 0
(a
2
4a + 3) x
2
+ (a
2
5a + 6) x + a + 5 = 0
lies at infinity then possible
integral values of a will be
(B) Smallest value of natural (Q) 1
no. n so that
(2 n) x
2
8x 4 n < 0 x R
is
(C) No. of solution of | x 2 | = [ ] (R) 5
is ([ . ] denotes greatest integer)
(D) No. of values of k so that (S) 3
equation (k 3) (k
2
4) (k + 1) x
2

(k
3
5k
2
+ 6k) x +k
2
9 = 0
has more than two distinct roots are (T) 4

14. Column-I Column-II
(A) Maximum value of n for which (P) 7

+
>
15
1
1
n

|
.
|

\
|
+
n
n
1
2
1
is (n N)
(B) Positive integral value of n so (Q) 17
that
1.2
1
+ 2.2
2
+ 3.2
3
... + n.2
n
= 2 + 2
n+5

is
(C) No. of positive integral ordered (R) 8
pair of (a, b) such that 6, a, b
are in Harmonic progression is
(D) If x, y, z are positive real no. (S) 5
& x =
z y
yz 12
+

then maximum
value of xyz will be (T) 9

This section contains 6 questions (Q.15 to 20). The
answer to each of the questions is a Single-digit
integer, ranging from 0 to 9. The bubble
corresponding to the correct answer is to be darkened
in the OMR. +4 marks will be given for each correct
answer and no negative marking for each wrong
answer.
15. If positive no. x, y, z are in A.P. then minimum
value of
x y 2
y x

+
+
z y 2
z y

+
is.

16. The number of positive integral values of n for
which n! ends with exactly 25 zeroes is.

17. The equation x
3
+ 5x
2
+ px + q = 0 and
x
3
+ 7x
2
+ px + r = 0 have two roots in common. If
third root of each equation is given as &
respectively then no. of ordered pair (, ) is.

18. If log 2 = x and log 3 = y, then
[log 1 + log (1 + 3) + log (1 + 3 + 5) +
log (1 + 3 + 5 ... + 19)] 2 [log 1 + log 2 ... + log7]
= a + bx + cy where a, b, c are positive integers,
then a + b c equals.
19. Let n = 2011 then least positive integral value of k such
that k(n
2
) (n
2
1
2
) (n
2
2
2
) ... (n
2
(n 1)
2
) = r ! for
some positive integer r.

20. Value of
3 2 1
1
+ +
+
3 2 1
1
+
+
3 2 1
1
+

+
3 2 1
1

is.













































Elements Named After People



There are 13 elements named after people, although
only 12 of the names are formally accepted by the
International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry
(IUPAC)
1. Bohrium (Bh, 107) Niels Bohr
2. Curium (Cm, 96) Pierre and Marie Curie
3. Einsteinium (Es, 99) Albert Einstein
4. Fermium (Fm, 100) Enrico Fermi
5. Gallium (Ga, 31) named after Gallia (Latin
for France) and its discoverer, Lecoq de
Boisbaudran (le coq, the French word for
'rooster' translates to gallus in Latin)
6. Hahnium (105) Otto Hahn (Dubnium, named
for Dubna in Russia, is the IUPAC-accepted
name for element 105)
7. Lawrencium (Lr, 103) Ernest Lawrence
8. Meitnerium (Mt, 109) Lise Meitner
9. Mendelevium (Md, 101) Dmitri Mendeleev
10. Nobelium (No, 102) Alfred Nobel
11. Roentgenium (Rg, 111) Wilhelm Roentgen
(formerly Ununumium)
12. Rutherfordium (Rf, 104) Ernest Rutherford
13. Seaborgium (Sg, 106) Glenn T
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 61 JUNE 2011













Part (A) : CHEMISTRY



1. The presence or absence of hydroxy group on
which carbon atom of sugar differentiates RNA and
DNA ?
(1) 1
st
(2) 2
nd

(3) 3
er
(4) 4
th

Ans. [2]
Sol.

H H
H
CH
OH
OH
OH OH
3
1
2
3
4
5
OH
H H
H
CH
OH
OH
OH H
3
1
2
3
4
5
OH

Ribose in RNA Deoxyribose in DNA

2. Among the following the maximum covalent
character is shown by the compound :
(1) Fe Cl
2
(2) SnCl
2

(3) AlCl
3
(4) MgCl
2

Ans. [3]
Sol. Due to larger +ve charge on Al In Al
+3
it will
polarize more Cl



3. Which of the following statements is wrong?
(1) The stability of hydrides increases from NH
3
to
BiH
3
in group 15 of the periodic table.
(2) Nitrogen cannot from d p bond.
(3) Single N - N bond is weaker than the single P -
P bond.
(4) N
2
O
4
has two resonance structures
Ans. [1]

4. Phenol is heated with a solution of mixture of KBr
and KBrO
3
. The major product obtained in the
above reaction is :
(1) 2-Bromophenol (2) 3-Bromophenol
(3) 4-Bromophenol (4) 2, 4, 6-Tribomophenol
Ans. [4]
Sol. KBr + KBrO
3
Br
2
(in Solution)

OH
Br2
in Solution
Br
OH
Br
Br

5. A 5.2 molal aqueous solution of methyl alcohol,
CH
3
OH, is supplied. What is the mole fraction of
methyl alcohol in the solution ?
(1) 0.100 (2) 0.190
(3) 0.086 (4) 0.050
Ans. [3]
Sol. 5.2 molal CH
3
OH
CH
3
OH H
2
O
5.2 mole 1000 gm
X
CH3OH
=
2 . 5
18
1000
2 . 5
+

= 0.085667 0.086

6. The hybridisation of orbitals of N atom in
+
2 3
NO , NO and
+
4
NH are respectively :
(1) sp, sp
2
, sp
3
(2) sp
2
, sp, sp
3

(3) sp, sp
3
, sp
2
(4) sp
2
, sp
3
, sp
Ans. [2]
7. Ethylene glycol is used as an antifreeze in a cold
climate. Mass of ethylene glycol which should be
added to 4 kg of water to prevent it from freezing at
6 C will be : (K
f
for water = 1.86 K kg mol
1
, and
molar mass of ethylene glycol = 62 g mol
1
)
(1) 804.32 g (2) 204.30 g
(3) 400.00 g (4) 304.60 g
Ans. [1]
AIEEE PAPER 2011
(PAPER & SOLUTION) DATE : 01-05-2011
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 360

Instructions :
There are three parts in question paper A, B, C consisting of chemistry, Physics & Mathematics having
30 questions in each part of equal weightage. Each question is allotted four marks for each correct response.
1/4 (one fourth) marks will be deducted for indicating incorrect response of each question. No deduction from the
total score will be made if no response is indicated for an item in the answer sheet.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 62 JUNE 2011
Sol. T
f
= i K
f
m
6 = (1) (1.86)
4 62
x



x = gm 800
86 . 1
62 24
86 . 1
4 62 6
=

=



8. The reduction potential of hydrogen half-cell will
be negative if :
(1) P(H
2
) = 1atm and [H
+
] = 2.0 M
(2) p(H
2
) = 1 atm and [H
+
] = 1.0 M

(3) p(H
2
) = 2 atm and [H
+
] = 1.0 M
(4) p(H
2
) = 2 atm and [H
+
] = 2.0 M
Ans. [3]
Sol. 2H
+
+ 2e H
2

E
R
= E
R
+
2
H
2
p
] H [
log
2
06 . 0
+


2
H
P = 2atm, [H
+
] =1 M

9. Which of the following reagents may be used to
distinguish between phenol and benzoic acid ?
(1) Aqueous NaOH (2) Tollen's reagent
(3) Molisch reagent (4) Neutral FeCl
3

Ans. [4]
Sol. Phenol
) Neutral ( FeCl
3
Violet Coloured Complex

10. Trichloroacetaldehyde was subjected to
Cannizzaro's reaction by using NaOH. The mixture
of the products contains sodium trichloroactate and
another compound. The other compound is :
(1) 2, 2, 2-Trichloroethanol
(2) Trichloromethanol
(3) 2, 2,2-Trichloropropanol
(4) Chloroform
Ans. [1]
Sol. CCl
3
CHO
NaOH

CCl
3
COONa + CCl
3
CH
2
OH

11. Which one of the following orders presents the
correct sequence of the increasing basic nature of
the given oxides ?
(1) Al
2
O
3
< MgO < Na
2
O < K
2
O
(2) MgO < K
2
O < Al
2
O
3
< Na
2
O
(3) Na
2
O < K
2
O < MgO < Al
2
O
3

(4) K
2
O < Na
2
O < Al
2
O
3
< MgO
Ans. [1]

12. A gas absorbs a photos of 355 nm and emits at two
wavelengths. If one of the emissions is at 680 nm,
the other is at:
(1) 1035 nm (2) 325 nm
(3) 743 nm (4) 518 nm
Ans. [3]
Sol.
2 1
1 1 1



2
1
680
1
355
1

+ =
mm 743 769 . 742
2
=

13. Which of the following statements regarding
sulphur is incorrect ?
(1) S
2
molecule is paramagnetic
(2) The vapour at 200 C consists mostly
(3) At 600 C the gas mainly consists of S
2

molecules
(4) The oxidation state of sulphur is is never less
than +4 in its compounds.
Ans. [4]

14. The entrophy change involved in the isothermal
reversible expansion of 2 moles of an ideal gas
from a volume of 10 dm
3
to a volume of 100 dm
3
at
27 C is :
(1) 38.3 J mol
2
K
1
(2) 35.8 J mol
1
K
1

(3) 32.3 J mol
1
K
1
(4) 42.3 J mol
1
K
1

Ans. [1]
Sol. S = 2.303 n R log
1
2
v
v

= 2.303 2 8.314 1
38.3 J mole
1
k
1


15. Which of the following facts about the complex
[Cr(NH
3
)
6
] Cl
3
is wrong ?
(1) The complex involves d
2
sp
3
hybridisation and
is octahedral in shape.
(2) The complex is paramagnetic
(3) The complex is an outer robital complex
(4) The complex gives white precipitate with silver
nitrate solution.
Ans. [3]

16. The structure of IF
7
is :
(1) square pyramid (2) trigonal bipyramid
(3) octahedral (4) pentagonal bipyramid
Ans. [4]

17. The rate of a chemical reaction doubles for every
10 C rise of temperature. If the temperature is
raised by 50 C, the rate of the reaction increase by
about :
(1) 10 times (2) 24 times
(3) 32 times (4) 64 times
Ans. [3]
Sol. K
2
= K
1

10
T
) (


r
2
= r
1

10
T
) (



10
50
1
2
) 2 (
r
r
=

= 32
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 63 JUNE 2011
18. The strongest acid amongst the following
compounds is
(1) CH
3
COOH
(2) HCOOH
(3) CH
3
CH
2
CH(Cl)CO
2
H
(4) ClCH
2
CH
2
CH
2
COOH
Ans. [3]
Sol. P
Ka
Value of HCOOH is 3.74 while P
Ka
value of
CH
3
CH
2
CH(Cl)COOH is 2.86
and Acidic strength
Ka
P
1


19. Identify the compound that exhibits tautomerism.
(1) 2- Butene (2) Lactic acid
(3) 2-Pentanone (4) Phenol
Ans. [3]
Sol.
CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
C
O
CH
3 CH
3
CH
2
CH
2
C
OH
CH
2


20. A vessel at 1000 K contains CO
2
with a pressure of
0.5 atm. Some of the CO
2
is converted into CO on
the addition of graphic. If the total pressure at
equilibrium is 0.8 atm, the value of K is :
(1) 1.8 atm (2) 3 atm
(3) 0.3 atm (4) 0.18 atm
Ans. [1]
Sol. C + CO
2
2CO
(s) (g) (g)
P
1
O
P
1
P
2
2p
2

P
1
= 0.5
P
1
+ P
2
= 0.8
P
2
= 0.3
8 . 1
P
P
K
2
CO
2
CO
p
= =

21. In context of the lanthanoids, which of the
following statements is not correct ?
(1) There is gradual decrease in the radii of the
members with increasing atomic number in the
series
(2) All the members exhibit +3 oxidation state.
(3) Because of similar properties the separation of
lanthanoids is not easy.
(4) Availability of 4f electrons results in the
formation of compounds in +4 state for all the
members of the series.
Ans. [4]
22. 'a' and 'b' are van der Waals' constants for gases.
Chlorine is more easily liquefied than ethane
because:
(1) a and b for Cl
2
> a and b for C
2
H
6

(2) and b for Cl
2
< a and b for C
2
H
6

(3) a for Cl
2
< a for C
2
H
6
but b for Cl
2
> b for C
2
H
6

(4) a for Cl
2
> a for C
2
H
6
but b for Cl
2
< b for C
2
H
6

Ans. [4]
Sol. Liquefaction T
C

b
a


23. The magnetic moment (spin only) of [NiCl
4
]
2
is:
(1) 1.82 BM (2) 5.46 BM
(3) 2.82 BM (4) 1.41 BM
Ans. [3]

24. In a face centred cubic lattice, atom A occupies the
corner positions and atom B occupies the face
centre positions. If one atom of B is missing from
one of the face centred points, the formula of the
compound is:
(1) A
2
B (2) AB
2

(3) A
2
B
3
(4) A
2
B
5

Ans. [4]
Sol. A B
8
8
1

2
1
5
2 5
A
2
B
5

25. The outer electron configuration of Gd (Atomic N :
64) is :
(1) af
3
5d
5
6s
2
(2) 4f
8
5d
0
6s
2

(3) 4f
4
5d
4
6s
2
(4) 4f
7
5d
1
6s
2

Ans. [4]

26. Boron cannot form which one of the following
anions ?
(1)
3
6
BF (2)

4
BH
(3)

4
) OH ( B (4)

2
BO
Ans. [1]
27. Ozonolysis of an organic compounds gives
formaldehyde as one of the products. This confirms
the presence of :
(1) two ethylenic double bonds
(2) v vinyl group
(3) an isopropyl group
(4) an acetylenic triple bond
Ans. [2]
Sol. R C = CH
2

+Zn O H ) ii ( O ) i (
2 3
HCHO
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 64 JUNE 2011
28. Sodium ethoxide has reacted with ethanoyl
chloride. The compound that is produced in the
above reaction is :
(1) Diethyl ether (2) 2-Butanone
(3) Ethyl chloride (4) Ethyl ethanoate
Ans. [4]
Sol. CH
3
COCl + CH
3
CH
2
ONa CH
3
COO C
2
H
5


29. The degree of dissociation () of a weak
electrolyte, A
x
B
y
is related to van't Hoff factor (i)
by the expression :
(1)
) 1 y x (
1 i
+

=
(2)
1 y x
1 i
+ +

=
(3)
1 i
1 y x

+
=

(4)
1 i
1 y x

+ +
=
Ans. [1]
Sol. A
x
B
y
x A
+y
+ y B
x


) 1 y x (
1 i
1 n
1 i
+

=

30. Silver Mirror test is given by which one of the
following compounds ?
(1) Acetaldehyde (2) Acetone
(3) Formaldehyde (4) Benzophenone

Ans. [1, 3]
Sol. Aldehyde gives silver mirror test.


Part (B) : PHYSICS

31. 100 g of water is heated from 30 C to 50C.
Ignoring the slight expansion of the water, the
change in its internal energy is (specific heat of
water is 4184 J/kg/K) :
(1) 4.2 kJ (2) 8.4 kJ
(3) 84 kJ (4) 2.1 kJ
Ans. [2]
Sol. U M s 0.1 4184 20 8368 8.4kJ = = = =

32. The half life of a radioactive substance is 20
minutes. The approximate time interval (t
2
t
1
)
between the time t
2
when
2
3
of it has decayed an
time t
1
when
1
3
of it had decayed is :
(1) 7 min (2) 14 min
(3) 20 min (4) 28 min
Ans. [3 ]
Sol. half life T = 20 min
Q
t
0
N
e
N

=
We have at t = t
1
,
1
t
1
1 e
3

= .(i)
at t = t
2
,
2
t
2
1 e
3

= .(ii)
dividing (i) / (ii) we get
2 1
(t t )
2 e

=

e 2 1
log 2 (t t ) =

e
2 1
log 2
(t t ) T 20min = = =



33. A mass M, attached to a horizontal spring, executes
S.H.M. with amplitude A
1
. When the mass M
passes through its mean position then a smaller
mass m is placed over it and both of them move
together with amplitude A
2
. The ratio of
1
2
A
A
| |
|
\ .
is :
(1)
M
M m +
(2)
M m
M
+

(3)
1/ 2
M
M m
| |
|
+
\ .
(4)
1/ 2
M m
M
+ | |
|
\ .

Ans. [4]
Sol. By momentum conservation
Mv = (M + m)v
MA
1

1
= (M + m)A
2

2

MA
1
M
k
= (M + m) A
2
m M
k
+


2
1
A
A
=
M
m M+


34. Energy required for the electron excitation in Li
++

from the first to the third Bohr orbit is :
(1) 12.1 eV (2) 36.3 eV
(3) 108.8 eV (4) 122.4 eV
Ans. [3]
Sol. For Li
++
, Z = 3
Energy needed
= (13.6 eV)
2 2
2 2
Z Z
108.8eV
(3) (1)
(
=
(



35. The transverse displacement y(x, t) of a wave on a
string is given by
2 2
(a x bt 2 ab xt )
y(x, t) e
+ +
=
This represents a :
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 65 JUNE 2011
(1) wave moving in +x direction with speed
a
b

(2) wave moving in x direction with speed
b
a

(3) standing wave of frequency b
(4) standing wave of frequency
1
b

Ans. [2]
Sol.
2 2
(a x bt 2 ab xt )
y(x, t) e
+ +
= =
2
( a x b t )
e
+

Comparing with y(x, t) f (kx t) = +
We get k a = , b = and the wave is travelling
in x direction with wave speed
b b
v
k a a

= = =

36. A resistor R and 2F capacitor in series is
connected through a switch to 200 V direct supply.
Across the capacitor is a neon bulb that lights up at
120 V. Calculate the value of R to make the bulb
light up 5s after the switch has been closed. (log
10

2.5 = 0.4)
(1) 1.3 10
4
(2) 1.7 10
5

(3) 2.7 10
6
(4) 3.3 10
7

Ans. [3]
Sol.
t /
c 0
V E (1 e )

=
Where RC =
Putting
c 0
V 120V, E 200V = =
We get t = log
e
(5/2) = 2.303 log
10
(5/2) RC
R = 2.7 10
6


37. A current I flows in an infinitely long wire with
cross section in the form of a semi-circular ring of
radius R. The magnitude of the magnetic induction
along its axis is :
(1)
0
2
I
R

(2)
0
2
I
2 R


(3)
0
I
2 R

(4)
0
I
4 R


Ans. [1]
Sol. Figure shows cross-section in the form of a semi-
circular ring of radius R.
The current along Rd portion (assuming
perpendicularly inward) is

I
dI Rd
R
=



0 0
dI Id
dB
2 R 2 R

= =



O R


dB
d
Rd


0 0
2 2
0
I I
B dBsin sin d
2 R R


= = =




38. A Carnot engine operating between temperatures
T
1
and T
2
has efficiency
1
6
. When T
2
is lowered by
62 K; its efficiency increases to
1
3
. Then T
1
and T
2

are respectively:
(1) 372 K and 310 K (2) 372 K and 330 K
(3) 330 K and 268 K (4) 310 K and 248 K
Ans. [1]
Sol.
Lower
Higher
T
1
T
=

2
1
T 1
1
T 6
=

2
1
T 5
T 6
= .(i)
Given
2
2
(T 62) 1
1
T 3

= .(ii)
Solving (i) & (ii), we get
T
1
= 372 K
and T
2
= 310 K

39. An object, moving with a speed of 6.25 m/s, is
decelerated at a rate given by :
dv
2.5 v
dt
=
where v is the instantaneous speed. The time taken
by the object, to come to rest, would be :
(1) 1 s (2) 2 s
(3) 4 s (4) 8 s
Ans. [2]
Sol.
dv
2.5 v
dt
=

0 t
1/ 2
25 0
4
5
v dv dt
2

=



0
1/ 2
25
4
5
2 v t
2
( =



5 5
2 0 t
2 2
(
=
(


t = 2 sec.

40. The electrostatic potential inside a charged
spherical ball is given by = a r
2
+ b where r is the
distance from the centre; a, b are constants. Then
the charge density inside the ball is :
(1) 24 a
0
r (2) 6 a
0
r
(3) 24 a
0
(4) 6 a
0

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 66 JUNE 2011
Ans. [4]
Sol. Given = a r
2
+ b
comparing with
2 2
3
kQ
V (3R r )
2R
=
The above comparison suggest that density should
be uniform.
Now
d
E 2ar
dr

= =
Comparing with
0
r
E
3


We get
0
r
2ar
3



0
6a =

41. A car is fitted with a convex side-view mirror of
focal length 20 cm. A second car 2.8 m behind the
first car is overtaking the first car at a relative speed
of 15 m/s. The speed of the image of the second car
as seen in the mirror of the first one is :
(1)
1
m/ s
10
(2)
1
m/ s
15

(3) 10 m / s (4) 15 m / s
Ans. [2]
Sol.
1 1 1
v u f
+ =
u 2.8m =
f = +0.2 m
We get
v 0.2
u 3
=

2
IM OM
v
v v
u
| |
=
|
\ .


2
.2
15
3
| |
=
|
\ .


1
m/ s
15
=
42. If a wire is stretched to make it 0.1% longer, its
resistance will :
(1) increase by 0.05% (2) increase by 0.2%
(3) decrease by 0.2% (4) decrease by 0.05%
Ans. [2]
Sol.
2
R l

43. Three perfect gases at absolute temperatures T
1
,T
2

and T
3
are mixed. The masses of molecules are m
1
,
m
2
and m
3
and the number of molecules are n
1
, n
2

and n
3
respectively. Assuming no loss of energy,
the final temperature of the mixture is :
(1)
1 2 3
(T T T )
3
+ +

(2)
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 2 3
n T n T n T
n n n
+ +
+ +

(3)
2 2 2
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
n T n T n T
n T n T n T
+ +
+ +

(4)
2 2 2 2 2 2
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
n T n T n T
n T n T n T
+ +
+ +

Ans. [2]
Sol. By energy conservation
P
1
V
1
+ P
2
V
2
+ P
3
V
3
= P
f
V
f

n
1
R T
1
+ n
2
R T
2
+ n
3
R T
3
= (n
1
+ n
2
+ n
3
) R T
f


1 1 2 2 3 3
f
1 2 3
n T n T n T
T
n n n
| | + +
=
|
+ +
\ .


44. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a
common point by two massless strings of length l
are initially a distance d(d <<1) apart because of
their mutual repulsion. The charge begins to leak
from both the spheres at a constant rate. As a result
the charges approach each other with a velocity v.
Then as a function of distance x between them,
(1)
1/ 2
v x

(2)
1
v x


(3)
1/ 2
v x (4) v x
Ans. [1]
Sol. We get
e
F d / 2
tan sin
mg
= =
l


2
e 2
kq
F
d
=
Q is small
tan sin =
On solving we get

2
kq (2 )
dq
mg
=
l


3/ 2
q d

dq 3 d(d)
d
dt 2 dt



l
l
q,m q,m
mg mg
F
e
F
e
d

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 67 JUNE 2011
Given
dq
dt
is constant

1 d(d)
v v
dt d

=
`
)
Q

1/ 2
v d



45. Work done in increasing the size of a soap bubble
from a radius of 3 cm to 5 cm is nearly (surface
tension of soap solution = 0.03 Nm
1
) :
(1) 4 mJ (2) 0.2 mJ
(3) 2 mJ (4) 0.4 mJ
Ans. [4]
Sol. W = TA

( )
2 2
2 1
T2 4 r r
(
=


= 0.4 mJ

46. A fully charged capacitor C with initial charge q
0
is
connected to a coil of self inductance L at t = 0.
The time at which the energy is stored equally
between the electric and magnetic fields is :
(1) LC (2) LC
4


(3) 2 LC (4) LC
Ans. [2]
Sol. Initial energy
2
0
E
q
U
2C
= at time t = 0
At the required time t = t

' E
E
U
U
2
=

2
q
q
0
=
(i)
Here q = q
0
cos t (ii)
From (i) and (ii) t LC
4 4

= =


1
LC

=
`
)


47. Two bodies of masses m and 4m are placed at a
distance r. The gravitational potential at a point on
the line joining them where the gravitational field is
zero is :
(1) Zero (2)
4Gm
r

(3)
6Gm
r
(4)
9Gm
r

Ans. [4]
Sol.

r
rx x
m m

2 2
Gm G 4m
(r )

=
x x


r
3
= x

Gm G4m
V
r r
r
3 3

=
| |

|
\ .


9Gm
V
r
=
48. A thin horizontal circular disc is rotating about a
vertical axis passing through its centre. An insect is
at rest at a point near the rim of the disc. The insect
now moves along a diameter of the disc to reach its
other end. During the journey of the insect, the
angular speed of the disc:
(1) remains unchanged
(2) continuously decreases
(3) continuously increases
(4) first increases and then decreases
Ans. [4]
Sol. Applying the law of conservation of angular
momentum, L = I = constant.
As the insect moves from the rim to the center, I
decreases, increases. Further on onward journey
from center to rim, I increases decreases.

49. Let the x z plane be the boundary between two
transparent media. Medium 1 in z > 0 has a
refractive index of 2 and medium 2 with z < 0
has a refractive index of 3 . A ray of light in
medium 1 given by the vector

A 6 3 i 8 3 j 10k = +
r
is incident on the plane of
separation. The angle of refraction in medium 2 is :
(1) 30 (2) 45
(3) 60 (4) 75
Ans. [2]

50 Two particles are executing simple harmonic
motion of the same amplitude A and frequency
along the x-axis. Their mean position is separated
by distance X
0
(X
0
> A). If the maximum separation
between them is (X
0
+ A), the phase difference
between their motion is :
(1)
2

(2)
3

(3)
4

(4)
6


Ans. [2]
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 68 JUNE 2011
Sol. x
1
= A sin t
x
2
= X
0
+ A sin (t + )
x
2
x
1
= X
0
+ A[sin (t + ) sin t]
= X
0
+ 2A sin /2 cos (t + /2)
We can see that x
2
x
1
, will change
its value from X
0
2Asin /2, to
X
0
+ 2A sin(/2)
comparing X
0
+ 2 A sin (/2) with X
0
+ A we
get = /3

51. Direction :
The question has a paragraph followed by two
statements, Statement-1 and Statement-2. Of the
given four alternatives after the statements, choose
the one that describes the statements.
A thin air film is formed by putting the convex
surface of a plane-convex lens over a plane glass
plate. With monochromatic light, this film gives an
interference pattern due to light reflected from the
top (Convex) surface and the bottom (glass plate)
surface of the film.
Statement 1 :
When light reflects from the air-glass plate
interface, the reflected wave surfers a phase change
of .
Statement 2 :
The centre of the interference pattern is dark.
(1) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is false
(2) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true and
Statement -2 is the correct explanation of
Statement -1.
(3) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true and
Statement 2 is not the correct explanation of
Statement 1.
(4) Statement -1 is false, Statement -2 is true.
Ans. [3 ]

52. The thermally insulated vessel contains an ideal gas
of molecular mass M and ratio of specific heat . It
is moving with speed v and is suddenly brought to
rest. Assuming no heat is lost to the surroundings,
its temperature increases by :
(1)
2
( 1)
Mv K
2( 1)R

+
(2)
2
( 1)
Mv K
2 R


(3)
2
Mv
K
2R

(4)
2
( 1)
Mv K
2R


Ans. [4]
Sol. Q 0(adiabatic process) =
By energy conservation

2
1 nR T
mv
2 1

=



2
1 mR T
mv
2 M( 1)

=



2
Mv ( 1)
T
2R

=

53. A screw gauge gives the following reading when
used to measure the diameter of a wire.
Main scale reading : 0 mm.
Circular scale reading : 52 divisions
Given that 1 mm on main scale corresponds to 100
divisions of the circular scale.
The diameter of wire from the above data is :
(1) 0.52 cm (2) 0.052 cm
(3) 0.026 cm (4) 0.005 cm
Ans. [2]
Sol. Main scale reading = 0.00
Circular scale reading =
1
52 mm 0.52mm
100
=
Diameter of wire = 0.00 + 0.52 = 0.52 mm
= 0.052 cm
54. A boat is moving due east in a region where the
earths magnetic field is 5.0 10
5
NA
1
m
1
due
north and horizontal. The boat carries a vertical
aerial 2m long. If the speed of the boat is 1.50 ms
1
,
the magnitude of the induced emf in the wire of
aerial is :
(1) 1 mV (2) 0.75 mV
(3) 0.50 mV (4) 0.15 mV
Ans. [4]
Sol. E = Bvl
= 5 10
5
1.50 2
= 15 10
5

= 1.5 10
4

= 0.15 mV

55. This question has Statement-1 and Statement-2. Of
the four choices given after the statements, choose
the one that best describes the two statements.
Statement-1 :
Sky wave signals are used for long distance radio
communication. These signals are in general, less
stable than ground wave signals.
Statement -2 :
The state of ionosphere varies from hour to hour,
day to day and season to season.
(1) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is false
(2) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true and
Statement -2 is the correct explanation of
Statement -1.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 69 JUNE 2011
(3) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true and
Statement 2 is not the correct explanation of
Statement 1.
(4) Statement -1 is false, Statement -2 is true.
Ans. [ 4]
56. A mass m hangs with the help of a string wrapped
around a pulley on a frictionless bearing. The
pulley has mass m and radius R. Assuming pulley
to be a perfect uniform circular disc, the
acceleration of the mass m, if the string does not
slip on the pulley, is :
(1)
3
g
2
(2) g (3)
2
g
3
(4)
g
3

Ans. [3]
Sol.
m
T
T
m

T R I =

2
1 a
T R mR
2 R
= .(i)
mg T ma = (ii)

2g
a
3
=

57. A water fountain on the ground sprinkles water all
around it. If the speed of water coming out of the
fountain is v, the total area around the fountain that
gets wet is :
(1)
2
v
g
(2)
4
2
v
g

(3)
4
2
v
2 g

(4)
2
2
v
g

Ans. [2]
Sol. Area = r
2
Where r = maximum range =
2
v
g

Area =
4
2
v
g


58. This question has Statement-1 and Statement-2. Of
the four choices given after the statements, choose
the one that best describes the two statements.
Statement 1 :
A metallic surface is irradiated by a monochromatic
light of frequency >
0
(the threshold frequency).
The maximum kinetic energy and the stopping
potential are K
max
and V
0
respectively. If the
frequency incident on the surface is doubled, both
the K
max
and V
0
are also doubled.
Statement -2 :
The maximum kinetic energy and the stopping
potential of photoelectrons emitted from a surface
are linearly dependent on the frequency of incident
light.
(1) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is false
(2) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true and
Statement -2 is the correct explanation for
Statement -1.
(3) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true and
Statement -2 is the correct explanation of
Statement -1.
(4) Statement -1 is false, Statement -2 is true.
Ans. [4]
Sol.
max 0
K eV =
also
max 0
K h =
when frequency is doubled, K
max
will be more than
double

59. A pulley of radius 2m is rotated about its axis by a
force F = (20t 5t
2
) newton (where t is measured in
seconds) applied tangentially. If the moment of
inertia of the pulley about its axis of rotation is
10 kg m
2
, the number of rotations made by the
pulley before its direction of motion if reversed, is :
(1) less than 3
(2) more than 3 but less than 6
(3) more than 6 but less than 9
(4) more than 9
Ans. [2]
Sol. Given tangential force, F = (20t 5t
2
)
F R = I
(20t 5t
2
) 2 = 10
= 4t t
2


d
dt

= 4t t
2


2
d (4t t )dt =



3
2
t
2t
3
= .(i)
when direction of motion is reversed, then
= 0.
t = 6 sec
From (i)
3
2
d t
2t
dt 3

=

6 3
2
0 0
t
d 2t dt
3

| |
=
|
\ .


= 36
Number of rotation =
2

=
36
5.73
2
=


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 70 JUNE 2011
60. Water is flowing continuously from a tap having an
internal diameter 8 10
3
m. The water velocity as
it leaves the tap is 0.4 ms
1
. The diameter of the
water stream at a distance 2 10
1
m below the tap
is close to :
(1) 5.0 10
3
m (2) 7.5 10
3
m
(3) 9.6 10
3
m (4) 3.6 10
3
m
Ans.[4]
Sol.
2
1 1
1 1
d
a , v 0.4ms
4

= =

2
1 1 2
2 2
d
a , v 2gh 2 10 2 10 2ms
4

= = = =
According to equation of continuity
a
1
v
1
= a
2
v
2

d
2
= 3.6 10
3
m

Part (C) : MATHEMATICS


61. Let , be real and z be a complex number. If
0 z z
2
= + + has two distinct roots on the line
Re z = 1, then it is necessary that :
(1) ) 1 , 0 ( (2) ) 0 , 1 (
(3) 1 | | = (4) ) , 1 (
Ans.[4]
Sol. Given Re (z) = 1 If z = x + iy
x = 1
Let z
1
= 1 + ib
1

& z
2
= 1 + ib
2

then
0 z z
2
= + +
z
1
+ z
2
=
2 + i (b
1
+ b
2
) = . Purely real.
b
1
+ b
2
= 0
Also = 2
0 4
2
<
0 4 4 <
4 4 >
1 >

62. The value of

+
+
1
0
2
dx
x 1
) x 1 log( 8
is
(1) 2 log (2) 2 log
8


(3) 2 log
2

(4) log 2
Ans. [1]
Sol. = tan x Put
= d sec dx
2

= tan x Put


+
+
=
4 /
0
2
2
d sec
tan 1
) tan 1 log( 8
I

+ =
4 /
0
d ) tan 1 log( 8

+ =
4 /
0
d ) tan 1 log( 8
2 log
8
8

=
+

d ) tan 1 log( as
4 /
0

2 log =

63.
2
2
dy
x d
equals :
(1)
1
2
2
dx
y d

|
|
.
|

\
|
(2)
3
1
2
2
dx
dy
dx
y d

|
.
|

\
|
|
|
.
|

\
|

(3)
2
2
2
dx
dy
dx
y d

|
.
|

\
|
|
|
.
|

\
|
(4)
3
2
2
dx
dy
dx
y d

|
.
|

\
|
|
|
.
|

\
|

Ans. [4]
Sol.
dx
dy
1
dy
dx
=

dy
dx
.
dx
dy
dx
d
dx
dy
dy
d
dy
dx
dy
d
1 1
|
.
|

\
|
= |
.
|

\
|
=
|
|
.
|

\
|


1
2
2
2
dx
dy
dx
y d
dx
dy

|
.
|

\
|
|
.
|

\
|
=

3
2
2
dx
dy
dx
y d

|
.
|

\
|
=

64. Let I be the purchase value of an equipment and
V(t) be the value after it has been used for t years.
The value V(t) depreciates at a rate given by
differential equation ) t T ( k
dt
) t ( dV
= , where k >
0 is a constant and T is the total life in years of the
equipment. Then the scrap value V(T) of the
equipment is :
(1)
k
I
T
2
(2)
2
kT
I
2

(3)
2
) t T ( k
I
2

(4) ekT
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 71 JUNE 2011
Ans. [2]
Sol. ) t T ( k
dt
dv
=
dt ) t T ( k dv

=

I V
0 t when c
2
kt
kTt V
2
=
= + + =

I = c
I
2
kT
kTt ) t ( V
2
+ + =
I
2
kT
kT ) T ( V
2
2
+ + =

2
kT
I ) T ( V
2
=

65. The coefficient of x
7
in the expansion of
(1 x x
2
+ x
3
)
6
is :
(1) 144 (2) 132
(3) 144 (4) 132
Ans. [3]
Sol. (1 x x
2
+ x
3
)
6

(1 x
2
)
6
(1 x)
6

= [1 6x
2
+ 15x
4
20x
6
] [1 6x + 15x
2
20x
3

+ 15x
4
6x
5
+ x
6
]

7
x ) 120 300 36 ( + =
144 =

66. For |
.
|

\
|

2
5
, 0 x , define
dt t sin t ) x ( f
x
0

=
Then f has :
(1) local maximum at and 2
(2) local minimum at and 2
(3) local maximum at and local maximum at 2
(4) local maximum at and local minimum at 2
Ans. [4]
Sol.

|
.
|

\
|
=
x
0
2
5
, 0 dt t sin ) x ( f

= =
= =
2 , x 0 x sin
0 x sin x ) x ( ' f

x cos x x sin
x 2
1
) x ( " f + =

ima min 2 x 1 2 ) 2 ( " f
ima max x 0 ) ( " f
= =
= < =


67. The area of the region enclosed by the curves y = x,
x = e, y = 1/x and the positive x-axis is :
(1) 1/2 square units (2) 1 square units
(3) 3/2 square units (4) 5/2 square units
Ans. [3]
Sol.

(e, e)
y

| |
e
1
1
0
2
e
1
1
0
x log
2
x
dx
x
1
xdx +
(
(

= +



2
3
1
2
1
e log
2
1
= + = + =

68. The lines L
1
: y x = 0 and L
2
: 2x + y = 0 intersect
the line L
3
: y + 2 = 0 at P and Q respectively. The
bisector of the acute angle between L
1
and L
2

intersects L
3
at R.
Statement -1:
The ratio PR : RQ equals 5 : 2 2
Statement-2:
In any triangle, bisector of an angle divides the
triangle into two similar triangles.
(1) Staement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement -2 is a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(3) Statement -1 is true, Statement-2 is false.
(4) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true.
Ans. [3]
Sol.

L
L
P
(2,2)
R
Q
(1, 2)
y = 2
y = 0
O
(0, 0)
y = x
y y = 2x

true
5
2 2
OQ
OP
RQ
PR
= =
Statement -1 is true
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 72 JUNE 2011
Statement-2 is false
Hence (3) is correct

69. The value of p and q for which the function

>
+
=
<
+
=
0 x ,
x
x x x
0 x , q
0 x ,
x
x sin x ) 1 p sin(
) x ( f
2 / 3
2

is continuous for all x in R, are :
(1)
2
3
q ,
2
1
p = = (2)
2
1
q ,
2
5
p = =
(3)
2
1
q ,
2
3
p = = (4)
2
3
q ,
2
1
p = =
Ans. [3]
Sol. f(0) = q

2 / 3
2
h
h h h
RHL
+
=

2
1
) 1 h 1 (
) 1 h 1 (
h
) 1 h 1 (
=
+ +
+ + +
=

2
1
q =
LHL =
h
h sin h ) 1 P sin( 1

+ +

2 P
1 h
h h ) 1 P (
+ =
+ +


2
1
2 P = +

2
3
2
2
1
P = =

70. If the angle between the line

=
3 z
2
1 y
x and
the plane x + 2y + 3z = 4 is
|
|
.
|

\
|

14
5
cos
1
, then
equals :
(1) 2/3 (2) 3/2
(3) 2/5 (4) 5/2
Ans. [1]
Sol.
2
5 14
x 3 4 1
14
3
+
+ +
=
) 3 5 ( 5 3
2
+ = +

2 2
) 3 5 ( ) 5 ( 9 + = +
+ + = + 30 9 25 9 45
2 2


3
2
30
20
= =

71. The domain of the function

x | x |
1
) x ( f

= is :
(1) ) , ( (2) ) , 0 (
(3) ) 0 , ( (4) } 0 { ) , (
Ans. [3]
Sol.
x | x |
1
) x ( f

=
) 0 , ( x x | x | 0 x | x | > >
Hence (3)

72. The shortest distance between line y x = 1 and
curve x = y
2
is :
(1)
4
3
(2)
8
2 3

(3)
2 3
8
(4)
3
4

Ans.[2]
Sol.
2
y x 1 x y = + =
find the pt of x = y
2
, where tangent in parallel to y
= x + 1,

y 2
1
dx
dy
dx
dy
y 2 1 y x
2
= = =

4
1
x
2
1
y 1
y 2
1
= = =
so tangent will be
y = x + 1/4
distance between
4
1
x y & 1 x y + = + = will be -

8
2 3
2 4
3
2
4 / 3
d = = =

73. A man saves Rs. 200 in each of the first three
months of his service. In each of the subsequent
months of his service. In each of the subsequent
months his saving increases by Rs. 40 more than
the saving of immediately previous month. His
total saving from the start of service will be Rs.
11040 after :
(1) 18 months (2) 19 months
(3) 20 months (4) 21 months
Ans. [4]
Sol. | | 11040 40 ) 1 n ( 480
2
n
3 ) 200 ( = + +
on solving we get n = 18
Hence total months = 3 + 18 = 21

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 73 JUNE 2011
74. Consider the following statements
P : Suman is brilliant
Q : Suman is rich
R : Suman is honest
The negation of the statement "Suman is brilliant
and dishonest if and only if Suman is rich" can be
expressed as :
(1) ) R Q (
^
P ~ (2) )) R ~
^
P ( Q ( ~
(3)
^
P ~ Q ~ (4) Q ) R ~
^
P ( ~
Ans.[2, 4]
Sol. ( ) | | Q R ~
^
P ~
p q
q p


| | ) R ~
^
P ( Q ~
table truth by Q ) R ~
^
P ( ~ &

75. If ) 1 ( is a cube rot of unit, and
= = + B A ) 1 (
7
. Then (A, B) equals :
(1) (0, 1) (2) (1, 1)
(3) (2, 0) (4) (1, 1)
Ans. [2]
Sol. + = = = = + 1 ) ( ) 1 (
2 14 7 2 7

+ = + = + B A 1 ) 1 (
7

1 B , 1 A = =


76. If ( ) k

3
10
1
a + =
r
and
( ) k

6 j

3 i

2
7
1
b + =
r
, then the value of
( ) ( ) ( ) | | b 2 a b a b a 2
r
r
r
r
r
r
+ is :
(1) 5 (2) 3 (3) 5 (4) 3
Ans. [1]
Sol. )) b 2 a ( ) b a ).(( b a 2 ( + =
) b 2 ) b a ( a ) b a ).(( b a 2 ( + + =
) a ) b . b ( b ) b . a (( 2 a ) b . a ( b ) b a ).(( b a 2 ( + =
) a . a )( b . b ( 4 ) b . a )( b . a ( 4 | a | ) b . a ( 2 ) b . a ( | a | 2
2 2
+ =
) b . a ( | b | 2 | b | ) b . a ( 2 ) b . a )( b . a ( | b | | a |
2 2 2 2
+ + =

2 2 2
| a | | b | 5 ) b . a ( 5 =
) k

6 j

3 i

2 (
7
1
b ) k

3 (
10
1
a + = + =
r
r

0 ) 6 6 (
10 7
1
b . a = =
r
r


1
7
7
| b |
1
10
10
| a |
= =
= =

5 5 0 = =
77. If 0 3 y
dx
dy
> + = and y (0) =2, then y (ln 2) is
equal to :
(1) 7 (2) 5
(3) 13 (4) 2
Ans. [1]
Sol. 3 y
dx
dy
+ =


=
+
dx
3 y
dy

c x ) 3 y ln( + = +
3 e y
c x
=
+

2 3 ) 0 ( = =
c
e y
5 e
c
=
5 ln c =
3 e ) 2 (ln f
5 ln 2 ln
=
+

3 e
10
ln
=
= 10 3 = 7

78. Equation of the ellipse whose axes are the axes of
coordinates and which passes through the point
(3, 1) and has eccentricity
5
2
is :
(1) 0 32 y 5 x 3
2 2
= +
(2) 0 48 y 3 x 5
2 2
= +
(3) 0 15 y 5 x 3
2 2
= +
(4) 0 32 y 3 x 5
2 2
= +
Ans. [1, 2]
Sol. (i) 1
b
y
a
x
2
2
2
2
= +
1
b
1
a
9
2 2
= +
1
b 3
5
a
9
2 2
= +

3
32
a 1
a 3
5 27
2
2
= =
+
, now |
.
|

\
|
=
3
2
1 a b
2 2


5
32
5
a 3
b
2
2
= =
1
32
y 5
32
x 3
is eq
2 2
n
= +
0 32 y 5 x 3
2 2
= +
(ii) if
5
b 3
5
2
1 b a
2
2 2
= |
.
|

\
|
=
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 74 JUNE 2011
1
b
1
a
9
2 2
= +

3
48
b 1
b 3
48
1
b
1
b 3
45
2
2 2 2
= = = +

5
48
a
2
=
0 48 y 3 x 5 1
48
y 3
48
x 5
2 2
2 2
= + = +

79. If the mean deviation about the median of the
numbers a, 2a, ....... 50a is 50, then |a| equals :
(1) 2 (1) 3
(3) 4 (4) 6
Ans.[3]
Sol. Mean of a, 2a, 3a......... 50a
a
2
51
2
a 26 a 25
Median =
+
=
..........
2
51
2
2
51
50
50
) (
+ + = =

a a a a
M x

a a a a a a
2
51
50 ....
2
51
26
2
51
25 ......... + + + +
= 2500
2500
2
a
......
2
a 45
a
2
47
2
a 49
2 = |
.
|

\
|
+ + + +
(1 + 3 + ..... + 4a) = 2500
( ) 2500 a 49 1
2
25
= +
25 25a = 2500
a = 4
80
|
|
.
|

\
|


2 x
)} 2 x ( 2 cos{ 1
lim
2 x

(1) does not exist (2) equals 2
(3) equals 2 (4) equals
2
1

Ans.[1]
Sol.
2 x
) 2 x ( 2 cos 1
lim
2 x



) 2 x (
| ) 2 x sin( | 2


=
LHL = 2
2 x
)) 2 x sin( ( 2
lim
2 x
=


RHL = 2
2 x
) 2 x sin( 2
lim
2 x
=


limit does not exist


81. Statement-1 :
The number of ways of distributing 10 identical
balls in 4 distinct boxes such that no box is empty
is
9
C
3
.
Statement-2:
The number of ways of choosing any 3 places from
9 different places is
9
C
3
.
(1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(3) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false.
(4) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true.
Ans. [1]
Sol. St-1
3
9
1 4
1 10
1 r
1 n
C C C = =

True
St-2
3
9
r
n
C C = True

82. Let R be the set of real numbers.
Statement-1:
} eger int an is x y : R R ) y , x {( A = is an
equivalence relation on R.
Statement-2:
} number rational some for y x : R R ) y , x {( B = =
is an equivalence relation on R.
(1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(3) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false.
(4) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true.
Ans. [3]
Sol. St-1
} eger int an is x y , R R ) y , x {( A =
Relfexive : x - x is also Integer
so it is relfexive
symmetrix - y x I
then also x y I
so it is symmetric
Transitive y x I, & z y I
then z x is also integer
so A is equivalence.
so B is not equivalence.
St-2 y x : R R ) y , x {( B = =
Reflexive
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 75 JUNE 2011
1 for x x
so it is not reflexive
so B is not equivalence

83. Consider 5 independent Bernoulli's trials each with
probability of success p. If the probability of at
least one failure is greater than or equal to
32
31
,
then p lies in the interval :
(1)
(

\
|
4
3
,
2
1
(2)
(

\
|
12
11
,
4
3

(3)
(

2
1
, 0 (4)
(

\
|
1 ,
12
11

Ans. [3]
Sol.
32
31
) P ( 1 ) 1 n ( P
5
=


5
) P (
32
31
1
0 P
2
1


(

2
1
, 0 P

84. The two circles x
2
+ y
2
= ax and x
2
+ y
2
= c
2
(c > 0)
touch each other if :
(1) 2|a| = c (2) | a | = c
(3) a = 2c (4) | a | = 2c
Ans. [2]
Sol.
( ) c Radus 0 , 0 c c y x
2
a
Radus 0 ,
2
a
c 0 ax y x
2
2 2 2
1
2 2
= = +
= |
.
|

\
|
= +

Cindered of touch
c
1
c
2
= r
1
+ r
2

not possible
or c
1
c
2
= |r
1
r
2
|

2
a
c
2
a
=
|a| = c
85. Let A and B be two symmetric matrices of order 3.
Statement-1:
A(BA) and (AB)A are symmetric matrices.
Statement-2:
AB is symmetric matrix if matrix multiplication of
A with B is commutative.
(1) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is true;
Statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
Statement-1
(3) Statement-1 is true, Statement-2 is false.
(4) Statement-1 is false, Statement-2 is true.
Ans. [2]
Sol. St-1
A
1
= A B
1
= B (Given)
( )
1 1 1
A ) BA ( ) BA ( A =
= (A
1
B
1
) A
1

= (AB)A
= A(BA) A(BA) is symmetric
( )
1 1 1
) AB ( A A ) AB ( =
= A
1
(B
1
A
1
)
= (AB)A (AB)A is also symmetric
St 1 true
St-2 (AB)
1
= B
1
A
1

= BA
= AB
St-2 True but not correct exp. of 1

86. If C and D are two events such that D C and
, 0 ) D ( P then the correct statement among the
following is :
(1) ) C ( P ) D | C ( P = (2) ) C ( P ) D | C ( P
(3) ) C ( P ) D | C ( P < (4)
) C ( P
) D ( P
) D | C ( P =
Ans.[2]
Sol.

C
D


) D ( P
) D
^
C ( P
D
C
P = |
.
|

\
|


) D ( P
) C ( P
=
) C ( P )) D ( P ( ) C ( P ) D C ( < Q

87. The vectors

b and a are not perpendicular and

d and c are two vectors satisfying :

= d b c b
and 0 d . a =

. Then the vector

d is equal to :
(1)

|
|
|
.
|

\
|
c
b . a
c . b
b (2)

|
|
|
.
|

\
|
+ b
b . a
c . a
c
(3)

|
|
|
.
|

\
|
+ c
b . a
c . b
b (4)

|
|
|
.
|

\
|
b
b . a
c . a
c
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 76 JUNE 2011
Ans. [4]

Sol. d b c b
r r
r
r
=
0 d . a =
r
r

d ) b . a ( b ) d . a ( c ) b . a ( b ) c . a (
r r
r
r r
r r
r
r
r
r r
=

b . a
b ) c . a (
c d . r
r
r
r r
r
r
=
88. Statement 1 :
The point A(1, 0, 7) is the mirror image of the point
B (1, 6, 3) in the line :
.
3
2 z
2
1 y
1
x
=

=
Statement 2 :
The line :
3
2 z
2
1 y
1
x
=

= bisects the line


segment joining A(1, 0, 7) and B(1, 6, 3).
(1) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true;
Statement -2 is a correct explanation for
Statement -1
(2) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is true;
Statement -2 is not a correct explanation for
Statement -1.
(3) Statement -1 is true, Statement -2 is false.
(4) Statement -1 is false, Statement -2 is true.
Ans. [2]
Sol.
A(1, 0, 7)
(, 2 + 1 + 3 + 2
M
B(1, 6, 3)


3
2 z
2
1 y
1
x
=

=
d.r.s of A.M.
7 2 3 , 0 1 2 , 1 + +
0 3 ) 5 3 ( 2 ) 1 2 ( 1 ) 1 ( = + + +
0 15 9 2 4 1 = + + +
14 14 =
1 =
M (1, 3, 5)

2
x 1
1
+
=
x = 1

2
z 7
5
2
y 0
3
+
=
+
=
y = 6 z = 3
St- 1 correct
St-2 is also correct but not correct exp. of 1

89. If A = sin
2
x + cos
4
x, then for all real x:
(1) 1 A
4
3
(2) 1 A
16
13

(3) 1 < A < 2 (4)
16
13
A
4
3

Ans. [1]
Sol. A = sin
2
x + cos
4
x
= sin
2
x + cos
2
x.cos
2
x < 1
= 1- cos
2
x + cos
4
x
1
4
1
4
1
x cos ) x (cos
2 2 2
+ + =

4
3
4
3
2
1
x cos
2
2
+ |
.
|

\
|
=

(

1 ,
4
3
A

90. The number of values of k for which the linear
equations
4x + ky + 2z = 0
kx + 4y + z = 0
2x + 2y + z = 0
possess a non-zero solution is :
(1) 3 (2) 2
(3) 1 (4) zero
Ans. [2]
Sol. 0 =
0
1 2 2
1 4 k
2 k 4
=
4(4 2) k (k 2) + 2 (2k 8)
4 2 k
2
+ 2k + 4k 16 = 0
k
2
+ 6k 8 = 0
k
2
6k + 8 = 0
k
2
4k -2k + 8 = 0
k = 4, 2
no. of values of k is 2





XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 77 JUNE 2011













Part (A) : CHEMISTRY


1. Identify the incorrect statement from the
following-
(1) Ozone absorbs the intense ultraviolet radiation
of the sun
(2) Depletion of ozone layer is because of its
chemical reactions with chlorofluoro alkanes
(3) Ozone absorbs infrared radiation
(4) Oxides of nitrogen in the atmosphere can cause
the depletion of ozone layer
Ans. [3]
Sol. Ozone absorbs UV rays from sun and not infrared
radiation.
2. When r, P and M represent rate of diffusion,
pressure and molecular mass, respectively, then
the ratio of the rates of diffusion (r
A
/r
B
) of two
gases A and B, is given as -
(1) (P
A
/P
B
) (M
B
/M
A
)
1/2
(2) (P
A
/P
B
)
1/2
(M
B
/M
A
)
(3) (P
A
/P
B
) (M
A
/M
B
)
1/2
(4) (P
A
/P
B
)
1/2
(M
A
/M
B
)

Ans. [1]
Sol. r
d
p

M
p


B
A
r
r
=
2 / 1
A
B
B
A
M
M
P
P
|
|
.
|

\
|


3. Consider thiol anion (RS ) and alkoxy anion
(RO ). Which of the following statement is
correct ?
(1) RS is less basic but more nucleophilic than RO
(2) RS is more basic and more nucleophilic than
RO
(3) RS is more basic but less nucleophilic than
RO
(4) RS is less basic and less nucleophilic than
RO
Ans. [1]
Sol.
RO

RS

size
B.S.
B.S.
N.S.
size
N.S.


4. The change in the optical rotation of freshly
prepared solution of glucose is known as -
(1) racemisation (2) specific rotation
(3) mutarotation (4) tautomerism
Ans. [3]
Sol. Fact

5. The molality of a urea solution in which 0.0100g
of urea, [(NH
2
)
2
CO] is added to 0.3000 dm
3
of
water at STP is -
(1) 5.55 10
4
m (2) 33.3 m
(3) 3.33 10
2
m (4) 0.555 m
Ans. [1]
Sol. m =
30 . 0 60
01 . 0

=
30 60
1

= 5.55 10
4

d
water
= 1 kg/dm
3

6. The molecular velocity of any gas is -
(1) inversely proportional to absolute temperature
(2) directly proportional to square of temperature
(3) directly proportional to square root of
temperature
(4) inversely proportional to the square root of
temperature
Ans. [3]
Sol. V
mp
, V
rms
, V
av.


T

7. The correct order of acid strength of the following
compounds is :
A. Phenol
B. p-Cresol
C. m-Nitrophenol
D. p-Nitrophenol
(1) D > C > A >B (2) B > D > A >C
(3) A > B > D >C (4) C > B > A >D
AIEEE PAPER 2011
(PAPER & SOLUTION) DATE : 11-05-2011
Time : 3 Hours Max. Marks : 360

Instructions :
There are three parts in question paper A, B, C consisting of chemistry, Physics & Mathematics having
30 questions in each part of equal weightage. Each question is allotted four marks for each correct response.
1/4 (one fourth) marks will be deducted for indicating incorrect response of each question. No deduction from the
total score will be made if no response is indicated for an item in the answer sheet.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 78 JUNE 2011
Ans. [1]
Sol.

OH

0
OH


+H CH
3
+I

(A)

(B)

OH
+

NO
2
(C)

OH


M
I
(D)
I


D > C > A > B

8. The value of enthalpy change (H) for the reaction
C
2
H
5
OH
(l)
+ 3O
2(g)
2CO
2(g)
+ 3H
2
O
(l)


at 27C is 1366.5 kJ mol
1
. The value of internal
energy change for the above reaction at this
temperature will be -
(1) 1369.0 kJ (2) 1364.0 kJ
(3) 1361.5 kJ (4) 1371.5 kJ
Ans. [2]
Sol. H = E + n
g
RT
E = H n
g
RT
= 1366.5 (1) (8.3 10
3
) 300
= 1366.5 + 2.490
= 1364.01
_ ~ 1364 kJ

9. Thermosetting polymer, Bakelite is formed by the
reaction of phenol with -
(1) CH
3
CHO (2) HCHO
(3) HCOOH (4) CH
3
CH
2
CHO
Ans. [2]
Sol.
OH
+ HCH=O
Bakelite


10. Ozonolysis of an organic compound 'A' produces
acetone and propionaldehyde in equimolar
mixture. Identify 'A' from the following
compounds :
(1) 1 - Pentene
(2) 2 - Pentene
(3) 2 - Methyl - 2 - pentene
(4) 2 - Methyl - 1 - pentene
Ans. [3]
Sol.
CH
3 C CH
3
O
CH
3 CH CH
2 O
CH
3 CH C
CH
3
CH
2 CH
3
2-methyl-2-pentene



11. Consider the reaction :
4NO
2(g)
+ O
2(g)
2N
2
O
5(g)
,
r
H = 111kJ
If N
2
O
5(s)
is formed instead of N
2
O
5(g)
in the above
reaction, the
r
H value will be : (given, H of
sublimation for N
2
O
5
is 54 kJ mol
1
)
(1) + 54 kJ (2) + 219 kJ
(3) 219 kJ (4) 165 kJ
Ans. [3]
Sol. 4NO
2
+ O
2
2N
2
O
5
H = 111 (1)
(g)
4NO
2
+ O
2
2N
2
O
5
H = ? (2)
(s)

2N
2
O
5
2N
2
O
5
H = 54 2 ...(3)
(s) (g)

(1) (3)
H = 111 108 = 219 kJ

12. An acid HA ionise as
HA H
+
+ A


The pH of 1.0 M solution is 5. Its dissociation
constant would be -
(1) 5 (2) 5 10
8

(3) 1 10
5
(4) 1 10
10

Ans. [4]
Sol. pH =
2
1
pk
a

2
1
log C
5 =
2
1
pk
a

2
1
log 1
pk
a
= 10
k
a
= 10
10


13. The correct order of electron gain enthalpy with
negative sign of F, Cl, Br and I, having atomic
number 9, 17, 35 and 53 respectively, is -
(1) F > Cl > Br > I (2) Cl > F > Br > I
(3) Br > Cl > I > F (4) I > Br > Cl > F
Ans. [2]
Sol. Cl > F > Br > I
Order of electron gain enthalpy.



XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 79 JUNE 2011
14. The frequency of light emitted for the transition
n = 4 to n = 2 of He
+
is equal to the transition in H
atom corresponding to which of the following ?
(1) n = 2 to n = 1 (2) n = 3 to n = 2
(3) n = 4 to n = 3 (4) n = 3 to n = 1
Ans. [1]
Sol.
H
=
+

He


H
2
2
2
1
2
n
1
n
1
RZ
(
(

|
|
.
|

\
|
=
+ (
(

|
|
.
|

\
|

He
2
2
2
1
2
n
1
n
1
RZ

2
2
2
1
n
1
n
1
=
(

|
.
|

\
|

16
1
4
1
4

2
2
2
1
n
1
n
1
=
4
1
1
1

n
1
= 1
n
2
= 2

15. A 5% solution of can sugar (molar mass 342) is
isotonic with 1% of a solution of an unknown
solute. The molar mass of unknown solute in
g/mol is -
(1) 171.2 (2) 68.4
(3) 34.2 (4) 136.2
Ans. [2]
Sol.
1
=
2

c
1
= c
2


342
5
=
M
1

M =
5
342
= 68.4

16. In view of the signs of
r
G for the following
reactions :
PbO
2
+ Pb 2 PbO,
r
G < 0
SnO
2
+ Sn 2 SnO,
r
G > 0,
which oxidation states are more characteristic for
lead and tin ?
(1) For lead + 2, for tin + 2
(2) For lead + 4, for tin + 4
(3) For lead + 2, for tin + 4
(4) For lead + 4, for tin + 2
Ans. [3]
Sol. G < 0 spontaneous reaction
so
2 4
Pb Pb
+ +

Pb
+2
> Pb
+4
(stability)
G > 0 non-spontaneous reaction

2 4
Sn Sn
+ +

Sn
+4
> Sn
+2
(stability)
Pb
+2
, Sn
+4

17. The K
sp
for Cr(OH)
3
is 1.6 10
30
. The molar
solubility of this compound in water is -
(1)
4 30
10 6 . 1 (2)
4 30
27 / 10 6 . 1
(3) 1.6 10
30
/27 (4)
2 30
10 6 . 1
Ans. [2]
Sol. K
sp
= s(3s)
3
= 27s
4
= 1.6 10
30


27
10 6 . 1
4
s
30

=
18. The products obtained on heating LiNO
3
will be
(1) Li
2
O + NO
2
+ O
2
(2) Li
3
N + O
2

(3) Li
2
O + NO + O
2
(4) LiNO
2
+ O
2

Ans. [1]
Sol. LiNO
3

Li
2
O + NO
2
+ O
2


19. Resistance of 0.2 M solution of an electrolyte is 50
. The specific conductance of the solution is 1.3
S m
1
. If resistance of the 0.4 M solution of the
same electrolyte is 260 , its molar conductivity
is -
(1) 6.25 10
4
S m
2
mol
1
(2) 625 10
4
S m
2
mol
1

(3) 62.5 S m
2
mol
1

(4) 6250 S m
2
mol
1

Ans. [1]
Sol.
m
=
M
1000
( = 1.3 S m
1
= 1.3 10
2
S cm
1
)

M
1000
a
1

=
l


a R
1 l
=

a
l
= R = 1.3 10
2
50 = 65.0 10
2
cm
1

m
=
4 . 0
1000
10 65
260
1
2



= 6.25 S mol
1
cm
2

= 6.25
100
1
100
1
m
2

6.25 10
4
m
2
S mol
1

20. Among the ligands NH
3
, en, CN

and CO the
correct order of their increasing field strength, is-
(1) NH
3
< en < CN

< CO
(2) CN

< NH
3
< CO < en
(3) en < CN

< NH
3
< CO
(4) CO < NH
3
< en < CN


Ans. [1]
Sol. According to spectrochemical series increasing
order of strength of ligands is
NH
3
< en < CN

< CO
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 80 JUNE 2011
21. Consider the following reaction :
C
2
H
5
OH + H
2
SO
4
Product
Among the following, which one cannot be
formed as a product under any conditions ?
(1) Ethylene (2) Acetylene
(3) Diethyl ether (4) Ethyl-hydrogen sulphate
Ans. [2]
Sol.

C
2
H
5
OH
H
2
SO
4
110C

C
2
H
5
OSO
3
H
C
2
H
5
OC
2
H
5
CH
2
= CH
2
140C

170C



22. The non aromatic compound among the following
is -
(1)

S
(2)


(3)

(4)


Ans. [4]
Sol.


There is no continuous resonance thus it is non-
aromatic.

23. The number of types of bonds between two carbon
atoms in calcium carbide is -
(1) One sigma, one pi (2) Two sigma, one pi
(3) Two sigma, two pi (4) One sigma, two pi
Ans. [4]
Sol. Calcium carbide is a ionic carbide
Ca
2+
[CC]
2

It contains 1 and 2 bonds.

24. A reactant (A) forms two products :
A
1
k
B, Activation Energy Ea
1

A
2
k
C, Activation Energy Ea
2

If Ea
2
= 2 Ea
1
, then k
1
and k
2
are related as -
(1)
RT Ea
e k k
/
1 2
1
= (2)
RT Ea
e k k
/
1 2
2
=
(3)
RT Ea
e Ak k
/
2 1
1
= (4)
RT Ea
e k k
/
2 1
2
2 =
Ans. [3]
Sol. k
1
=
RT
Ea
1
1
e A


k
2
=
RT
Ea
2
2
e A



RT
Ea
RT
Ea
1
2
1
2
1 2
e
A
A
k
k
+
=

RT
Ea Ea
1
2
2 1
Ae
k
k

= (Ea
2
= 2Ea
1
)

RT
Ea
1
2
1
Ae
k
k

=
k
2
= Ak
1
RT
Ea
1
e


k
1
= Ak
2

RT
Ea
1
e
+


25. Copper crystallizes in fcc lattice with a unit cell
edge of 361 pm. The radius of copper atom is -
(1) 108 pm (2) 128 pm
(3) 157 pm (4) 181 pm
Ans. [2]
Sol. 4r = a 2
r =
4
2
361
= 127.61
~
128 pm

26. The mass of potassium dichromate crystals
required to oxidize 750 cm
3
of 0.6 M Mohr's salt
solution is : (Given molar mass : potassium
dichromate = 294, Mohr's salt = 392)
(1) 0.45 g (2) 22.05 g
(3) 2.2 g (4) 0.49 g
Ans. [2]
Sol. gm eqv. = gm. Eqv.
of of
Mohr's K
2
Cr
2
O
7

salt

w . E
gm
1000
) ml ( NV
=

6
294
x
1000
) 750 1 6 . 0 (
=


x =
1000
294 75
6
294
1000
750 6 . 0
=


= 22.05 gm

27. What is the best description of the change that
occurs when Na
2
O(s) is dissolved in water ?
(1) Oxide ion accepts sharing in a pair of electrons
(2) Oxide ion donates a pair of electrons
(3) Oxidation number of oxygen increases
(4) Oxidation number of sodium decreases
Ans. [1]
Sol. Na
2
O + H
2
O 2NaOH


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 81 JUNE 2011
28. Which of the following has maximum number of
lone pairs associated with Xe ?
(1) XeF
4
(2) XeF
6

(3) XeF
2
(4) XeO
3

Ans. [3]
Sol. XeF
2
has maximum number of lone pairs
(3 lone pairs)

29. In the chemical reactions

NH
2
NaNO2
HCl,278 K
A

CuCN

B,
the compounds A
and B respectively are -
(1)Benzene diazonium chloride and benzonitrile
(2) Nitrobenzene and chlorobenzene
(3) Phenol and bromobenzene
(4) Fluorobenzene and phenol
Ans. [1]
Sol.
NH
2
NaNO
2
/HCl
N=NCl

CuCN
CN
Sand
mayer
reaction

30. Which one of the following complex ions has
geometrical isomers ?
(1) [Ni(NH
3
)
5
Br]
+
(2) [Co(NH
3
)
2
(en)
2
]
3+

(3) [Cr(NH
3
)
4
(en)]
3+
(4) [Co(en)
3
]
3+

(en = ethylenediamine)
Ans. [2]
Sol.

Co
NH
3
NH
3
en
en
3+

cis
Co
NH
3
en
en
3+
trans
NH
3

It has geometrical isomers.

Part (B) : PHYSICS


31. At time t = 0s a particle starts moving along the x-
axis. If its kinetic energy increases uniformly with
time 't', the net force acting on it must be
proportional to -
(1) constant (2) t (3)
t
1
(4) t
Ans. [3]
Sol. K.E. t i.e., t mv
2
2
1

v t
a =
dt
dv

t 2
1
, F = ma
F
t
1


32. At two points P and Q on a screen in Young's
double slit experiment, waves from slits S
1
and S
2

have a path difference of 0 and
4

respectively.
The ratio of intensities at P and Q will be -
(1) 2 : 1 (2) 2 : 1 (3) 4 : 1 (4) 3 : 2
Ans. [1]
Sol. I =4I
0
cos
2
/2
I
P
= 4I
0
cos
2
0 = 4I
0
.(1)
I
Q
= 4I
0
cos
2
2
4
4
0
I
= |
.
|

\
|
= 2I
0
.(2)
2 =
Q
P
I
I


33. Two particles of equal mass 'm' go around a circle
of radius R under the action of their mutual
gravitational attraction. The speed of each particle
with respect to their centre of mass is -
(1)
R
Gm
4
(2)
R
Gm
3

(3)
R
Gm
2
(4)
R
Gm

Ans. [1]
Sol.
2
2
) R 2 (
Gm
=
R
mv
2

v =
R 4
GM

R
m
m

34. The minimum force required to start pushing a
body up a rough (frictional coefficient ) inclined
plane is F
1
while the minimum force needed to
prevent it from sliding down is F
2
. If the inclined
plane makes an angle from the horizontal such
that tan = 2 then the ratio
2
1
F
F
is -
(1) 1 (2) 2
(3) 3 (4) 4
Ans. [3]
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 82 JUNE 2011
Sol. F
1
= mg sin + mg cos ...(i)
F
2
= mgsin mgcos ...(ii)



m


2
1
F
F
=
1 tan
1 tan

+
=

+
2
2
=
1
3


35. If 400 of resistance is made by adding four 100
resistances of tolerance 5%, then the tolerance
of the combination is -
(1) 5% (2) 10%
(3) 15% (4) 20%
Ans. [1]
Sol. R = R
1
+ R
2
+ R
3
+R
4
= 400
%
R
R
=
400
] R R R R [
4 3 2 1
+ + +
100
=
400
20
100 = 5 %

36. An electric charge +q moves with velocity

V = i

3 + j

4 + k

, in an electromagnetic field
given by :

E = i

3 + j

+ k

2 and

B = i

+ j

3 . The y-component of the force


experienced by +q is -
(1) 11 q (2) 5 q
(3) 3 q (4) 2 q
Ans. [1]
Sol. Magnetic force ) ( B V q F
r r r
= j q

10 =
and electric force in direction of y-axis j q F

=
r

F
Net
= 11q in direction of y-axis.

37. The current in the primary circuit of a
potentiometer is 0.2 A. The specific resistance and
cross-section of the potentiometer wire are
4 10
7
ohm metre and 8 10
7
m
2
respectively.
The potential gradient will be equal to -
(1) 1 V/m (2) 0.5 V/m
(3) 0.1 V/m (4) 0.2 V/m
Ans. [3]
Sol.
A
i
L
V
AB

= = = 0.1 volt/meter

38. A particle of mass 'm' is projected with a velocity
making an angle of 30 with the horizontal. The
magnitude of angular momentum of the projectile
about the point of projection when the particle is
at its maximum height 'h' is -
(1) zero (2)
g
m
2
3


(3)
16
3

g
m
3

(4)
2
3

g
m
2


Ans. [3]
Sol.

= 30
r = H
v
v' = v cos 30

L = mvr
= m(vcos30)
|
|
.
|

\
|
g 2
30 sin v
2 2

=
g 2
mv
3

2
3

4
1

=
16
mv 3
3


39. The specific heat capacity of a metal at low
temperature (T) is given as :
C
p
(kJK
1
kg
1
) = 32
3
400
|
.
|

\
| T

A 100 gram vessel of this metal is to be cooled
from 20K to 4K by a special refrigerator
operating at room temperature (27C). The amount
of work required to cool the vessel is -
(1) greater than 0.148 kJ
(2) between 0.148 kJ and 0.028 kJ
(3) less than 0.028 kJ
(4) equal to 0.002 kJ
Ans. [2]
Sol. Q = mC
p
dT
= (100 10
3
) ] 0 100 [
400
32
3

(
(

|
.
|

\
|

T

= 0.002 KJ

W
Q
T T
T
2
2 1
2
=

= ; T
2
= 300 K, Q
2
= 0.002 KJ
If T
1
= 20 K, W = 0.148 KJ
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 83 JUNE 2011
T
2
= 4 K, W = 0.028 KJ
i.e., amount of work will be between 0.148 KJ to
0.028 KJ.

40. A wooden cube (density of wood 'd') of side 'l'
floats in a liquid of density '' with its upper and
lower surfaces horizontal. If the cube is pushed
slightly down and released, it performs simple
harmonic motion of period 'T'. Then, 'T' is equal
to -
(1) 2
g
ld

(2) 2
dg
l

(3) 2
g d
ld
) (
(4) 2
g d
l
) (


Ans. [1]
Sol.


x
L
L

Restoring force F
R
= (L
2
x)g ... (1)
In case of SHM F
R
= m
2
x ...(2)
From equation (1) & (2)
m
2
x = L
2
xg
(d)L
3

2
= L
2
g
dL
2
= g
dL
g
=

g
dL
T

= 2

41. A container with insulating walls is divided into
two equal parts by a partition fitted with a valve.
One part is filled with an ideal gas at a pressure P
and temperature T, whereas the other part is
completely evacuated. If the valve is suddenly
opened, the pressure and temperature of the gas
will be -
(1)
2
P
,
2
T
(2) P, T
(3) P,
2
T
(4)
2
P
T
Ans. [4]
Sol. It is free expansion of Ideal gas which is both
adiabatic and isothermal process.
T constant, so for the isothermal process
P
1
V
1
= (P
2
V
2
)
P
1
V
1
= P
2
(2V
1
)
P
2
=
2
P
1


42. In a Young's double slit experiment, the two slits
act as coherent sources of waves of equal
amplitude A and wavelength . In another
experiment with the same arrangement the two
slits are made to act as incoherent sources of
waves of same amplitude and wavelength. If the
intensity at the middle point of the screen in the
first case is I
1
and in the second case is I
2
, then the
ratio
2
1
I
I
is -
(1) 2 (2) 1
(3) 0.5 (4) 4
Ans. [1]
Sol. I
1
= 4I
0
cos
2
/2 = 4I
0
. (1)
I
2
= I
0
+ I
0
= 2I
0
. (2)
(for non coherent sources)

1
2
2
1
=
I
I

43. The output of an OR gate is connected to both the
inputs of a NAND gate. The combination will
serve as a -
(1) NOT gate (2) NOR gate
(3) AND gate (4) OR gate
Ans. [2]
Sol.


OR gate
NOT gate
NOR gate


44. Two positive charges of magnitude 'q' are placed
at the ends of a side (side 1) of a square of side
'2a'. Two negative charges of the same magnitude
are kept at the other corners. Starting from rest, If
a charges Q moves from the middle of side 1 to
the centre of square, its kinetic energy at the centre
of square is -
(1) zero
(2)
0
4
1


a
qQ 2

|
|
.
|

\
|
+
5
1
1
(3)
0
4
1


a
qQ 2

|
|
.
|

\
|
5
2
1
(4)
0
4
1


a
qQ 2

|
|
.
|

\
|
5
1
1
Ans. [4]
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 84 JUNE 2011
Sol. W = q (V) = KE


q q
q
B
q
A


a
Kq
a
Kq
a
Kq
a
Kq
V
A
2 2
+ =
V
B
= 0

|
|
.
|

\
|
=
5
1
1
2
a
Kq
W

45. Combination of two identical capacitors, a resistor
R and a dc voltage source a voltage 6V is used in
an experiment on a (C R) circuit. It is found that
for a parallel combination of the capacitor the time
in which the voltage of the fully charged
combination reduces to half its original voltage is
10 second. For series combination the time needed
for reducing the voltage of the fully charged series
combination by half is -
(1)10 second (2) 5 second
(3) 2.5 second (4) 20 second
Ans. [3]
Sol.
T
2
C
R 693 . 0
10 C 2 R 693 . 0
=
=


T
10
2 / 1
1 / 2
=

T
10
1
4
=
T = 2.5 sec

46. A beaker contains water up to a height h
1
and
kerosene of height h
2
above water so that the total
height of (water + kerosene) is (h
1
+ h
2
).
Refractive index of water is
1
and that of
kerosene is
2
. The apparent shift in the position
of the of the beaker when viewed from above is-
(1)
|
|
.
|

\
|

+
1
1
1 h
1

|
|
.
|

\
|

+
2
1
1 h
2

(2)
|
|
.
|

\
|

1
1
1 h
1
+
|
|
.
|

\
|

2
1
1 h
2
(3)
|
|
.
|

\
|

+
1
1
1 h
2

|
|
.
|

\
|

+
2
1
1 h
1

(4)
|
|
.
|

\
|

1
1
1 h
2
+
|
|
.
|

\
|

2
1
1 h
1

Ans.[2]
Sol. Actual depth = (h
1
+ h
2
)
Apparent depth =
2
2
1
1

h h

Shift
|
|
.
|

\
|

+
2
2
1
1
2 1
) (
h h
h h

|
|
.
|

\
|

+
|
|
.
|

\
|

2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1 h h


47. A metal rod of Young's modulus Y and coefficient
of thermal expansion is held at its two ends such
that its length remains invariant. If its temperature
is raised by tC, the linear stress developed in it is-
(1)
t
Y

(2) Yt
(3)
) (
1
t Y
(4)
Y
t

Ans. [2]
Sol. Y =
Strain
Stress

Strain =
L
L
=
L
t L
= t
Stress = Y t

48. A traveling wave represented by y = A sin
(t kx) is superimposed on another wave
represented by y = A sin (t + kx). The resultant
is -
(1) A wave traveling along +x direction
(2) A wave traveling along x direction
(3) A standing, wave having nodes at
x =
2
n
; n = 0, 1, 2 ..
(4) A standing wave having nodes at
x = |
.
|

\
|
+
2
1
n
2

; n = 0, 1, 2..
Ans.[4]
Sol.


O
/4 /2
3/4

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 85 JUNE 2011
Y
1
= A sin (t kx)
Y
2
= A sin (t + kx)

R
Y

=
1
Y

+
2
Y

= 2A coskx sin t
So, nodes will be at .....
4
5
,
4
3
,
4



49. A thin circular disk of radius R is uniformly
charged with density > 0 per unit area. The disk
rotates about its axis with a uniform angular speed
. The magnetic moment of the disk is -
(1) R
4
(2)
2
4
R

(3)
4
4
R
(4) 2R
4

Ans. [3]
Sol.


x
dx

2
R
T
q
A i M = =
2
x
T
dq
dM =
=
2
x
T
dA



dM =


2
2
2
x dx x

= dx x M
3


4 4
4
0
4
R x
R

=
|
|
.
|

\
|
=

50. An aluminimum sphere of 20 cm diameter is
heated from 0C to 100C. Its volume changes by
(given that coefficient of linear expansion for
aluminium
Al
= 23 10
6
/C) -
(1) 2.89 cc (2) 9.28 cc
(3) 49.8 cc (4) 28.9 cc
Ans. [4]
Sol. = 3 = 3 23 10
6
= 69 10
6
/C

Q V =
3
3
4
r =
3 2
) 10 10 (
3
4


=
3
10
3
4



Change in volume (V)
V' V = Vt
= ) 0 100 ( 10 69
3
4
6 3
|
.
|

\
|


R = 28.9 cc

51. Two mercury drops (each of radius 'r') merge to
form a bigger drop. The surface energy of the
bigger drop, if T is the surface tension is -
(1) 4r
2
T (2) 2r
2
T
(3) 2
8/3
r
2
T (4) 2
5/3
r
2
T
Ans. [3]
Sol. Volume of big drop = total volume of small drops
R = 2
1/3
r
Surface energy of small drops U = 2T 4r
2

Surface energy of big drop
U' = T4R
2

= T 4(2
1/3
)
2
r
2

= T 4(2)
2/3
r
2

U' = T(2)
2
2
2/3
r
2

U' = T(2)
8/3
r
2


52. If a ball of steel (density = 7.8 g cm
3
) attains a
terminal velocity of 10 cm s
1
when falling in a
tank of water (coefficient of viscosity

water
= 8.5 10
5
Pa.s) then its terminal velocity
in glycerine ( = 1.2 g cm
3
, 13.2 Pa.s) would
be, nearly -
(1) 6.25 10
4
cm s
1
(2) 6.45 10
4
cm s
1
(3) 1.5 10
5
cm s
1
(4) 1.6 10
5
cm s
1
Ans. [1]
Sol. } {
9
2
2
l
d d g
r
V
b

=

)
`

=
2
1
1
2
2
1
d d
d d
V
V


)
`

=

2 . 1 8 . 7
1 8 . 7
10 5 . 8
2 . 13 10
4
V

V = 6.25 10
4
cm/s
53. A horizontal straight wire 20 m long extending
from east to west is falling with a speed of 5.0
m/s, at right angle to horizontal component of the
earth's magnetic field 0.30 10
4
Wb/m
2
. The
instantaneous value of the e.m.f induced in the
wire will be -
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 86 JUNE 2011
(1) 3 mV (2) 4.5 mV
(3) 1.5 mV (4) 6.0 mV
Ans. [1]
Sol. e = B v l
= 0.30 10
4
5 20
= 3 millivolt

54. After absorbing a slowly moving neutron of mass
m
N
(momentum ~ 0) a nucleus of mass M breaks
into two nuclei of masses m
1
and
5 m
1
(6 m
1
= M + m
N
), respectively. If the de
Broglie wavelength of the nucleus with mass m
1
is
, the de Broglie wavelength of the other nucleu
will be -
(1) 5 (2)
5

(3) (4) 25
Ans. [3]
Sol. Acceleration to momentum conservation, linear
momentum of both point is same So wavelength is
also same.

55. Which of the following four alternatives is not
correct ? We need modulation -
(1) to reduce the time lag between transmission
and reception of the information signal
(2) to reduce size of antenna
(3) to reduce the fractional band width, that is, the
ratio of the signal band width to the centre
frequency
(4) to increase the selectivity
Ans. [1]
Sol. Time is not dependent on modulation.
56. If a spring of stiffness 'k' is cut into two parts 'A'
and 'B' of length l
A
: l
B
= 2 : 3, then the stiffness of
spring 'A' is given by -
(1)
5
3k
(2)
5
2k

(3) k (4)
2
5
k
Ans. [4]
Sol.


l
A
l
B

l = l
A
+ l
B


3
2
=
B
A
l
l


l
1
K ... (1)

A
A
K
l
1
... (2)
From (2)/(1)

A
A
K
K
l
l
=

A
B A
A
} { K
K
l
l l +
=

)
`

+ =
A
B
A
K K
l
l
1

)
`

+ =
2
3
1 K K
A


2
5K
K
A
=

57. Statement-1
A nucleus having energy E
1
decays by

emission
to daughter nucleus having energy E but

rays
emitted with a continuous energy spectrum having
end point energy E
1
E
2
.
Statement-2
To conserve energy and momentum in -decay at
least three particles must take part in the
transformation.
(1) Statement-1 is correct but statement-2 is not correct
(2) Statement-1 and statement-2 both are correct
and statement-2 is the correct explanation of
statement-1
(3) Statement-1 is correct, statement-2 is correct and
statement-2 is not the correct explanation of
statemet-1
(4) Statement-1 is incorrect, statement-2 is correct.
Ans. [2]
Sol. Maximum energy = End point energy
= E
1
E
2

Three particles at least required
v e p n + +

4 4 4 3 4 4 4 2 1
0
1
1
1
1
0

v e n p + +
+
4 4 4 3 4 4 4 2 1
0
1
1
0
1
1

58. When monochromatic red light is used instead of
blue light in a convex lens, its focal length will -
(1) increase
(2) decrease
(3) remain same
(4) does not depen on colour of light
Ans. [1]
Sol. ) )( 1 (
1
k
f
=
f
f
R
> f
V

so increases.

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 87 JUNE 2011
59. Statement-1 :
On viewing the clear blue portion of the sky
through a Calcite Crystal, the intensity of
transmitted light varies as the crystal is rotated.
Statement-2 :
The light coming from the sky is polarized due to
scattering of sun light by particles in the
atmosphere. The scattering is largest for blue light.
(1) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false
(2) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is the correct explanation of
statement-1
(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is not the correct explanation of
statement-1
(4) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Ans. [2]
Sol. Statement-I Polarisation
Statement-II Raylegh's criteria
Scattering
4
1


So statement I and II both correct statement-II is
the correct explanation of statement-I.
60. Statement-1 :
Two longitudinal waves given by equations : y
1
(x,
t) = 2a sin (t kx) and
y
2
(x, t) = a sin (2t 2kx)
will have equal intensity
Statement-2 :
Intensity of waves of given frequency in same
medium is proportional to square of amplitude
only.
(1) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false
(2) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is the correct explanation of
statement-1
(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is not the correct explanation of
statement-1
(4) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Ans. [3]
Sol. a
1
= 2a, a
2
= a

1
= ,
2
= 2
I a
2
n
2
(for same medium)
So I
1
= I
2
statement-I (True)
Statement-II
n constant
I a
2

I = ka
2
(statement -II True )
But no correct explanation, because of frequency.

Part (C) : MATHEMATICS


61. Let f be a function defined by
f(x) = (x 1)
2
+ 1, (x 1)
Statement-1 :
The set{x : f(x) = f
1
(x)} = {1, 2}.
Statement-2 :
f is a bijection and f
1
(x) = 1 + 1 x , x 1
(1) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is a correct explanation for
statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true;
statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
statement-1

(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false
(4) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Ans. [2]
Sol. f(x) = (x 1)
2
+ 1 = y
(x 1)
2
= y 1
x 1 = 1 y
x = 1 1 y
f
1
(y) = 1 1 y
f
1
(y) = 1 + 1 y Q y 1
Statement 2 is true
f(x) = f
1
(x)
(x 1)
2
+ 1 = 1 + 1 x
(x 1)
2
= 1 x
Solving these we get x = 1, 2
Statement 1 is true.

62. If 1 is the complex cube root of unity and
matrix H =
(

0
0
, then H
70
is equal to -
(1) 0 (2) H

(3) H
2
(4) H
Ans. [4]
Sol. If H is scalar matrix
H =
(

x 0
0 x

H
n
=
(

n
n
x 0
0 x

H
70
=
(

70
70
0
0
=
(

0
0
= H

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 88 JUNE 2011
63. Let [.] denote the greatest integer function then
the value of

5 . 1
0
2
] [x x dx is -
(1) 0 (2)
2
3


(3)
4
3
(4)
4
5

Ans. [3]
Sol.

+ + =
1
0
2
1
5 . 1
2
5 . 1
0
2
2 0 ] [ dx x dx x dx dx x x
= 0 + ( )
5 . 1
2
2
2
1
2
2
x
x
+
|
|
.
|

\
|

=
4
3
) 2 25 . 2 (
2
1
1 = + |
.
|

\
|


64. The curve that passes through the point (2, 3), and
has the property that the segment of any tangent to
it lying between the coordinate axes is bisected by
the point of contact, is given by -
(1) 2y 3x = 0 (2) y =
x
6


(3) x
2
+ y
2
= 13 (4)
2
2
|
.
|

\
| x
+
2
3
|
.
|

\
| y
= 2
Ans. [2]
Sol.

(x, y)
(a, 0)
(0, b)

2
,
2
b
y
a
x = =
a = 2x b = 2y
&
a
b
dx
dy
=

x
dx
y
dy
x
y
dx
dy
=

=


=
x
dx
y
dy

log y = log x + log c xy = c
Q it passes through (2, 3)
c = 6
equation of curve is xy = 6

65. A scientist is weighing each of 30 fishes. Their
mean weight worked out is 30 gm and a standard
deviation of 2 gm. Later, it was found that the
measuring scale was misaligned and always under
reported every fish weight by 2 gm. The correct
mean and standard deviation (in gm) of fishes are
respectively -
(1) 32, 2 (2) 32, 4

(3) 28, 2 (4) 28, 4
Ans. [1]
Sol. There is no change in mean deviation if each
observation increased by a constant number while
mean increased by that constant number
Hence
A.M. = 30 + 2 = 32
M.D. = 2
66. The lines x + y = |a| and ax y = 1 intersect each
other in the first quadrant. Then the set of all
possible values of a is the interval -
(1) (0, ) (2) [1, )

(3) (1, ) (4) (1, 1]
Ans. [2]
Sol. x + y = a x + y = | a |
ax y = 1 ax y = 1
(1 + a)x = |a| + 1 ax + ay = a|a|
x =
a
a
+
+
1
1 | |
(a + 1)y = a|a| 1
y =
a
a a
+

1
1 | |

0
1
1 | |
>
+
+
a
a
, 0
1
1 | |
>
+

a
a a

a > 1
67. If the vectors i p

+ j

+ k

, i

+ j q

+ k

and
i

+ j

+ k r

(p q r 1) are coplanar, then the


value of pqr (p + q + r) is -
(1) 2 (2) 0

(3) 1 (4) 2
Ans. [4]
Sol.
0
1 1
1 1
1 1
=
r
q
p

p(qr 1) 1 (r 1) + 1 (1 q) = 0
pqr p r + 1 + 1 q = 0
pqr (p + q + r) + 2 = 0

68. The distance of the point (1, 5, 9) from the plane
x y + z = 5 measured along a straight line x = y =
z is -
(1) 10 3 (2) 5 3

(3) 3 10 (4) 3 5
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 89 JUNE 2011
Ans. [1]
Sol.
Q
P(1,5, 9)


Equation of PQ
=

=
+
=

1
9
1
5
1
1 z y x

Q( + 1, 5, + 9)
lies on x y + z = 5
+ 1 + 5 + + 9 = 5
= 10
Q = (9, 15, 1)
PQ =
2 2 2
) 1 9 ( ) 15 5 ( ) 1 9 ( + + + +
= 3 10

69. Let

a ,

b ,

c be three non-zero vectors which


are pairwise non-collinear. If

a + 3

b is
collinear with

c and

b + 2

c is collinear with

a , then

a + 3

b + 6

c is -
(1)

a (2)

c

(3)

0 (4)

a +

c
Ans. [3]
Sol. c b a
r
r
r
= + 3
a c b
r r
r
= + 2
) 3 ( 2 b c c b
r
r r
r
= +
b c c b
r
r r
r
= + 3 2
(1 3) b
r
+ (2 ) c
r
= 0
1 + 3 = 0 2 = 0
=
3
1
= 2
= 6
0 6 3 = + + c b a
r
r
r


70. If A(2, 3) and B(2, 1) are two vertices of a
triangle and third vertex moves on the line
2x + 3y = 9, then the locus of the centroid of the
triangle is -
(1) x y = 1 (2) 2x + 3y = 1

(3) 2x + 3y = 3 (4) 2x 3y = 1
Ans. [2]
Sol. A (2, 3) B(2, 1)
Centroid, (h, k)
Let third vertex is (, )
h =
+
3
2 2
, k =
+ +
3
1 3

= 3h
= 3k + 2
Q 2 +3 = 9
2(3h) + 3(3k + 2) = 9
6h + 9k + 6 = 9
6h + 9k = 3
2h + 3k = 1
locus 2x +3y = 1

71. There are 10 points in a plane, out of these 6 are
collinear. If N is the number of triangles formed
by joining these points, then -
(1) N 100 (2) 100 < N 140

(3) 140 < N 190 (4) N > 190
Ans. [1]
Sol. Max. traingles =
10
C
3

6
C
3

= 120 20
= 100
N 100

72. Define F(x) as the product of two real functions
f
1
(x) = x, x IR, and f
2
(x) =

0 , 0
0 ,
1
sin
x If
x If
x

as follows :
F(x) =

0 , 0
0 , ) ( ). (
2 1
x If
x If x f x f

Statement-1: F(x) is continuous on IR.
Statement-2: f
1
(x) and f
2
(x) are continuous on IR.
(1) Statement-1is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is a correct explanation for
statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true;
statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
statement-1

(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false
(4) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Ans. [3]
Sol. f
1
(x) = x is continuous every R
& f
2
(x) =

0 0
0 ;
1
sin
x
x
x
is discontinuous at x = 0
product of f
1
(x) and f
2
(x) is continuous
St. (1) is correct and (2) is false

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 90 JUNE 2011
73. Statement-1 : For each natural number n,
(n + 1)
7
n
7
1 is divisible by 7.
Statement-2 : For each natural number n, n
7
n
is divisible by 7.
(1) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is a correct explanation for
statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true;
statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
statement-1

(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false
(4) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Ans. [1]
Sol. By induction, to proof
S(n) = n
7
n is divisible by 7
Let n = 1
S(n = 1) = 1
7
1 = 0 7,
Hence it is true for n = 1
Let the statement is true for n = k
P(n = k) k
7
k is divisible by 7.
k
7
k = 7.
Now to proof the statement is true for n = k + 1
P(n = k + 1) (k + 1)
7
(k + 1) is divisisble
by 7
[1 +
7
C
1
k +
7
C
2
k
2
+ ..... +
7
C
6
k
6
+ k
7
] k 1
= 7. + (k
7
k)
= 7 + 7 = 7.( + )
which is divisible by 7.
Statement - 2 is true
Statement -1
n
7
n is divisible by 7
use it put n = n + 1
(n + 1)
7
(n + 1) = 7 True
[(n + 1)
7
n
7
1] + (n
7
n) = 7
= Stanement -1 + 7 = 7
statement-1 is true and statement-2 is also correct
explanation of Statement -1.

74. The equation of the circle passing through the
point (1, 0) and (0, 1) and having the smallest
radius is -
(1) x
2
+ y
2
2x 2y + 1 = 0
(2) x
2
+ y
2
x y = 0

(3) x
2
+ y
2
+ 2x + 2y 7 = 0
(4) x
2
+ y
2
+ x + y 2 = 0
Ans. [2]
Sol. Points will be end of diameter
(x 1) (x 0) + (y 0) (y 1) = 0
x
2
+ y
2
x y = 0

75. The equation of the hyperbola whose foci are
(2, 0) and (2, 0) and eccentricity is 2 is given by
(1) x
2
3y
2
= 3 (2) 3x
2
y
2
= 3

(3) x
2
+ 3y
2
= 3 (4) 3x
2
+ y
2
= 3
Ans. [2]
Sol. ae = 2
e = 2
a = 1
e
2
= 1 +
2
2
a
b

4 = 1 + b
2

b
2
= 3
1
3 1
2 2
=
y x


76. If the trivial solution is the only solution of the
system of equations
x ky + z = 0
kx + 3y kz = 0
3x + y z = 0
then the set of all values of k is -
(1) R {2, 3} (2) R {2}

(3) R { 3} (4) {2, 3}
Ans. [1]
Sol. 0 for trivial solution.

1 1 3
k 3 k
1 k 1

0
k
2
+ k 6 0
k R {3, 2}

77. Sachin and Rahul attempted to solve a quadratic
equation. Sachin made a mistake in writing down
the constant term and ended up in roots (4, 3).
Rahul made a mistake in writing down coefficient
of x to get roots (3, 2). The correct roots of
equation are -
(1) 6, 1 (2) 4, 3

(3) 6, 1 (4) 4, 3
Ans. [1]
Sol. Let quadratic equation be
x
2
+ bx + c = 0
+ = 4 + 3 = 7 = b
b = 7
. = 3.2 = 6 = c
correct quadratic equation
x
2
7x + 6 = 0
(x 1) (x 6) = 0
x = 1, 6
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 91 JUNE 2011
78. Let a
n
be the n
th
term of an A.P. If

=
100
1
2
r
r
a =
and

=

100
1
1 2
r
r
a = , then the common difference of
the A.P. is -
(1) (2)
100



(3) (4)
200


Ans. [2]
Sol. =

=
100
1
2
r
r
a
= +

=

d a
r
r
100
1
1 2



= =

= +
100
1
100
1
1 2
r r
r
d a
+ 100d =

100

= d

79. Consider the differential equation
y
2
dx +
|
|
.
|

\
|
y
x
1
dy = 0. If y(1) = 1, then x is given
by -
(1) 4
y
2

e
e
y
1
(2) 3
y
1
+
e
e
y
1


(3) 1 +
y
1

e
e
y
1
(4) 1
y
1
+
e
e
y
1

Ans. [3]
Sol.
y
x
y
dx
dy
1
2

=

2
1
y
y
x
dy
dx

=

3 2
1
y y
x
dy
dx
= +
I.F. =
y
dy
y
e e
1 1
2

=


dy e
y
e x
y y


=
/ 1
3
/ 1
.
1
.
=

dt e t
II
t
I

y
t
1
=
= { }

dt e te
t t
. 1

y
xe
/ 1
= c e te
t t
+ +

y
xe
/ 1
= + c e e
y
y y
+ +
/ 1 / 1
1

x = 1
1
+
y
+ ce
1/y

at x = 1, y = 1 1 = 2 + ce
1

c = 1/e
x =
y
e
e y
/ 1
1
1
1
+

80. Let f : R [0, ) be such that
5
lim
x
f(x) exists and
5
lim
x
| 5 |
9 )) ( (
2
x
x f
= 0. Then
5
lim
x
f (x) equals -
(1) 0 (2) 1

(3) 2 (4) 3
Ans. [4]
Sol. 0
| 5 |
9 )) ( (
lim
2
5
=

x
x f
x

Limit can be zero only when

5
lim
x
f(x) = 3

81. Statement-1 : Determinant of a skew-symmetric
matrix of order 3 is zero.
Statement-2 : For any matrix A, det(A
T
) = det(A)
and det(A) = det(A).
Where det (B) denotes the determinant of matrix
B. Then :
(1) Both statements are true
(2) Both statements are false

(3) Statement-1 is false and statement-2 is true
(4) Statement-1 is true and statement-2 is false
Ans. [4]
Sol. Statement-1 is true
Statement-2 is false
|A'| = |A| true
|A| = (1)
n
|A| false
Statement-2 is false
82. The possible values of (0, ) such that
sin() + sin(4) + sin(7) = 0 are -
(1)
4

,
12
5
,
2

,
3
2
,
4
3
,
9
8

(2)
9
2
,
4

,
2

,
3
2
,
4
3
,
36
35


(3)
9
2
,
4

,
2

,
3
2
,
4
3
,
9
8

(4)
9
2
,
4

,
9
4
,
2

,
4
3
,
9
8

XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 92 JUNE 2011
Ans. [4]
Sol. 2 sin 4 cos 3 + sin 4 = 0
sin 4 (2 cos 3 + 1) = 0
sin 4 = 0 cos 3 =
2
1

=
4
n
3 = 2n
3
2

= (3n 1)
9
2

Put n I
=
9
4
,
9
8
,
9
2
,
4
3
,
2
,
4



83. The area bounded by the curves y
2
= 4x and x
2
= 4y
is -
(1)
3
32
(2)
3
16


(3)
3
8
(4) 0
Ans. [2]
Sol. y
2
= 4ax & x
2
= 4by
Area bounded by these curve is
3
16ab

here a = b = 1
A =
3
16


84. Let f be a function defined by
f(x) =

0 , 1
0 ,
tan
x
x
x
x

Statement-1 : x = 0 is point of minima of f.
Statement-2 : f '(0) = 0.
(1) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is a correct explanation for
statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true;
statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
statement-1

(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false
(4) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Ans. [4]
Sol. [2]
Since we know in neighbourhood of x = 0,
1
tan
>
x
x
& f(0) = 1
x = 0 is point of minima
&
a x
a f x f
a f
a x

=

) ( ) (
lim ) ( '

x
x
x
f x f
f
x x
1
tan
lim
0
) 0 ( ) (
lim ) 0 ( '
0 0

=



2
0
tan
lim
x
x x
x

= 0
St. (1) & (2) both correct but (2) is not correct
explanation of (1)

85. The only statement among the followings that is a
tautology is -
(1) A (A B)
(2) A (A B)

(3) [A (A B)] B
(4) B [A (A B)]
Ans. [3]
Sol.
A B A B A B AB [A (AB)] SB
T T T T T T T
T F F T F F T
F T F T T F T
F F F F T F T
Hence [A (A B)] B is tautology

86. Let A, B, C be pairwise independent events with
P(C) > 0 and P(A B C) = 0.
Then P(A
C
B
C
|C) is equal to -
(1) P(A) P(B
C
) (2) P(A
C
) + P(B
C
)

(3) P(A
C
) P(B
C
) (4) P(A
C
) P(B)
Ans. [4]
Sol.
|
|
.
|

\
|
C
B A
P
=
) (
) (
C P
C B A P

=
) (
) ( ) ( ) ( ) (
C P
C B A P C B P C A P C P +

= 1 P(A) P(B)
= ) ( ) ( B P A P or ) ( ) ( A P B P

87. Let for a a
1
0,
f(x) = ax
2
+ bx + c, g(x) = a
1
x
2
+ b
1
x + c
1
and
p(x) = f(x) g(x).
If p(x) = 0 only for x = 1 and p(2) = 2, then the
value of p(2) is -
(1) 3 (2) 9

(3) 6 (4) 18
Ans. [4]
Sol. 0 = (a a
1
) (b b
1
) + (c c
1
) (1)
2 = (a a
1
) 4 (b b
1
)2 + (c c
1
) (2)
p(0) = c c
1
= 2 Q (x = 1) is only root
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 93 JUNE 2011
D = 0 of p(x) = 0 p(2) = p(0) = c c
1

= ?
To find (a a
1
) 4 + 2 (b b
1
) + (c c
1
) = p(2)
Let a a
1
= x and b b
1
= y
2x 2y + 4 = 0 (1)
4x 2y + 2 = 2 (2)
x = 2, y = 4
= 8 + 8 + 2 = 18
88. The length of the perpendicular drawn from the
point (3, 1, 11) to the line
2
x
=
3
2 y
=
4
3 z
is
(1) 29 (2) 33

(3) 53 (4) 66
Ans. [3]
Sol.
P(3, 1, 11)
L
Q

=

=
4
3
3
2
2
z y x

Q = (2, 3 + 2, 4 + 3)
D.r
s
of PQ = 2 3, 3 + 3, 4 8
Q L PQ
2(2 3) + 3(3 + 3) + 4 (4 8) = 0
4 6 + 9 + 9 + 16 32 = 0
29 = 29 = 1
Q (2, 5, 7)
PQ =
2 2 2
) 7 11 ( ) 5 1 ( ) 2 3 ( + +
= 16 36 1 + +
= 53

89. Consider the following relation R on the set of
real square matrices of order 3.
R = {(A, B)|A = P
1
BP for some invertible matrix
P}
Statement-1 : R is an equivalence relation.
Statement-2 : For any two invertible 3 3
matrices M and N, (MN)
1
= N
1
M
1
.
(1) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true,
statement-2 is a correct explanation for
statement-1
(2) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is true;
statement-2 is not a correct explanation for
statement-1

(3) Statement-1 is true, statement-2 is false
(4) Statement-1 is false, statement-2 is true
Ans. [4]
Sol. Statement -1
A = P
1
B P
PA = BP
P = {(A, A) | PA AP in general not
reflexive. So not equivalence relation.
Statement-2
(MN)
1
= N
1
M
1
True
from defination.

90. If function f(x) is differentiable at x = a then
a x
lim
a x
x f a a f x

) ( ) (
2 2
is -
(1) a
2
f '(a) (2) a f(a) a
2
f '(a)

(3) 2a f(a) a
2
f '(a) (4) 2a f(a) + a
2
f '(a)
Ans. [3]
Sol. |
.
|

\
|

form
a x
x f a a f x
a x
0
0 ) ( ) (
lim
2 2

Applying D.L.

a x
lim 2xf(a) a
2
f '(x)
= 2a f(a) a
2
f ' (a)
























AUTOMOBILE BATTERY


Lets pause briefly to discuss
a situation that illustrates the
concept of electric potential
difference. Consider the
common 12-V automobile battery. Such a battery
maintains a potential differences across its
terminals, where the positive terminal is 12 V
higher in potential than the negative terminal. In
practice, the negative terminal is usually connected
to the metal body of the car, which can be
considered at a potential of zero volts. The battery
becomes a useful device when it is connected by
conducting wires to such things as headlight, a
radio, power windows, motors, and so forth. Now
consider a charge of +1C, to be moved around a
circuit that contains the battery connected to some
of these external devices. As the charge is moved
inside the battery from the negative terminal (at 0V)
to the positive terminal (at 12 V), the work done by
the battery on the charge is 12 J. Thus, every
coulomb of positive charge that leaves the positive
terminal of the battery carries energy of 12 J. As
this charge moves through the external circuit
towards the negative terminal, it gives up its 12 J of
electrical energy to the external devices. When the
charge reaches the negative terminal, its electrical
energy is zero.
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 94 JUNE 2011
XtraEdge Test Series
ANSWER KEY

PHYSICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans D C D C B B C C A,D B,C,D B,D B,C,D
13 A S B P C P D P Column
Matching
14 A P.Q.S B R C P,Q,S D P, Q

15 16 17 18 19 20 Numerical
Response 2 5 6 5 2 1

CHEMISTRY
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans C A B A B B B A A,B,C,D A,D A,C,D A,C,D
13 A Q,R B Q,S C Q D P Column
Matching
14 A Q.S B P,R C P,S D P, S

15 16 17 18 19 20 Numerical
Response 6 4 2 3 2 4
MATHEMATICS

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans B A A C B A B B A,B,C,D A,B,D A,C,D A,B
13 A R B Q C P D S Column
Matching
14 A S B P C R D Q

15 16 17 18 19 20 Numerical
Response 2 6 2 1 2 1




PHYSICS
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans D B C D B D C A B,D B,C,D B,C B,C
13 A P,Q,R B P,Q,R C P,Q,R D S Column
Matching
14 A R B P C P D S

15 16 17 18 19 20 Numerical
Response 1 4 2 5 5 1

CHEMISTRY
Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans C D C B A D C C A,B A,B B,C A,B,C
13 A P,Q,S B P,Q,S C P, R D P,Q,R Column
Matching
14 A Q B P C S D R

15 16 17 18 19 20 Numerical
Response 5 5 1 2 8 5
MATHEMATICS

Ques 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Ans C B D B A B D B B,C B,C A,C B,C
13 A Q B R C P D Q Column
Matching
14 A S B Q C P D R

15 16 17 18 19 20 Numerical
Response 4 5 1 4 2 2
IIT- JEE 2012 (June issue)
IIT- JEE 2013 (June issue)
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 95 JUNE 2011


'XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
IIT JEE becoming more competitive examination day by day.
Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.


"XtraEdge for IIT JEE" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the forefront.
Every month get the XtraEdge Advantage at your door step.



Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of IIT JEE.


Predict future paper trends with XtraEdge Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.


Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills


Stay informed about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more XtraFunda.


Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of IITians


Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/Contests problems and Challenging Questions.

SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR EXTRAEDGE FOR IIT-JEE

The Manager-Subscription,
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
Career Point Infosystems Ltd,
4
th
Floor, CP-Tower,
IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005

I wish to subscribe for the monthly Magazine XtraEdge for IIT-JEE

Half Yearly Subscription (Rs. 100/-)

One Year subscription (Rs. 200/-)

Two year Subscription (Rs. 400/-)
I am paying R. .through
Money Order (M.O)
Bank Demand Draft of No..Bank..Dated
(Note: Demand Draft should be in favour of "Career Point Infosystems Ltd" payable at Kota.)

Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________

Father's Name: _______________________________________________________________________________________
Address: _______________________________________________________________________________________
________________________City_____________________________State__________________________
PIN_________________________________________Ph with STD Code __________________________
Class Studying in ________________E-Mail: ________________________________________________
From months: ____________________to ________________________________________________


Subscription Offer for Students
Special
Offer
C
C
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE 96 JUNE 2011


XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
IIT JEE becoming more competitive examination day by day.
Regular change in pattern making it more challenging.


"XtraEdge for IIT JEE" magazine makes sure you're updated & at the forefront.
Every month get the XtraEdge Advantage at your door step.



Magazine content is prepared by highly experienced faculty members on the latest trend of the IIT JEE.


Predict future paper trends with XtraEdge Test Series every month to give students practice, practice & more practice.


Take advantage of experts' articles on concepts development and problem solving skills


Stay informed about latest exam dates, syllabus, new study techniques, time management skills and much more XtraFunda.


Confidence building exercises with Self Tests and success stories of IITians


Elevate you to the international arena with international Olympiad/ Contests problems and Challenging Questions.

FREE SUBSCRIPTION FORM FOR EXTRAEDGE FOR IIT-JEE

The Manager-Subscription,
XtraEdge for IIT-JEE
Career Point Infosystems Ltd,
4
th
Floor, CP-Tower,
IPIA, Kota (Raj)-324005

We wish to subscribe for the monthly Magazine XtraEdge for IIT-JEE

Half Yearly Subscription

One Year subscription

Two year Subscription

Institution Detail:
Graduate Collage Senior Secondary School Higher Secondary School


Name of the Institute: _____________________________________________________________________________

Name of the Principal: _____________________________________________________________________________
Mailing Address: _____________________________________________________________________________
__________________City_________________________State__________________________
PIN_____________________Ph with STD Code_____________________________________
Fax_______________________________ E-Mail_____________________________________
Board/ University: _____________________________________________________________________________________



School Seal with Signature
Subscription Offer for Schools
C
C

You might also like